JP2023022269A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving the level of attention of a player to a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: starter ball entry means for causing a game ball flowing down in a game area formed in a game board to enter; variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols on the basis of a result of an internal lottery executed, triggered by an entry of a game ball into the starter ball entry means; expectation performance execution means for executing an expectation performance which causes a player to expect for a state advantageous for the player in the variable display means; and specific ball entry means for causing a game ball flowing down in the game area to enter. The expectation performance execution means includes: expectation performance end part for ending the expectation performance triggered by a ball entry into the specific ball entry means; and game state transit processing for make a setting to validate or invalidate the specific ball entry means. The expectation performance end part ends the expectation performance triggered by setting to validate the specific ball entry means by the game state transit processing and a ball entry into the specific ball entry means.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. Amusement machines are
For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display device, and the game state is shifted to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, in such a gaming machine, after starting the variable display of patterns, an expectation effect is executed to make the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, although the player's sense of expectation fluctuates according to the progress of the expected presentation, the player has to watch the expected presentation to the end, so there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable with this. be.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game.

The game machine of the present invention comprises a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the game ball. A starting ball entry means for executing a predetermined lottery, and a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns based on the results of a predetermined lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting ball entrance means. The game machine includes expected performance executing means for executing, by means of variable display means, an expected performance that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and game balls flowing down the game area. A specific ball entering means capable of entering a ball is provided, and the expected performance execution means sets the expected performance ending means for ending the expected performance when the ball enters the specific ball entering means, and enables or disables the specific ball entering means. and an invalid period setting means for setting the length of an invalid period during which the specific ball entry setting means invalidates the specific ball entry means; The specific ball entry means is effectively set in and the expected performance is terminated with the entry of the ball into the specific ball entry means as a trigger.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing Diagram showing an example of reach display A diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when a ball enters a variable prize-winning thru-gate when a ready-to-win display occurs. A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning thru gate when the reach display occurs A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the game result is "few rounds high probability result" A diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the ready-to-win display occurs. A diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning thru gate when the reach display occurs The front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of standby time setting processing A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning thru gate when the reach display occurs The figure which shows the flowchart of the game round control process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. A diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing A diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when a ball enters a variable winning through gate at the time of a promotion effect. A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the through gate for variable prize winning at the time of the promotion effect. A diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs. A diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs. Front view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A view showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the through gate for informing the number of rounds during the execution of the effect for the open/close execution mode. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the through gate for informing the number of rounds during execution of the effect for the open/close execution mode. The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing A diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when a ball enters a through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. A diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when a ball does not enter a through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. A diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. A display screen G of a ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game round when a ball enters the through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has passed and the game result is a "special loss result". diagram showing Shown is a display screen G of a ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game round when a ball enters a variable prize-winning through gate after the waiting time for the round game has passed and the game result is a "special loss result". figure

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward (front side). 12.

The game machine main body 12 includes an outer frame 1 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.
an inner frame (not shown) supported by 1, and a front door that is arranged in front of the inner frame and supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. It comprises a frame 13 and a back pack unit (not shown) which is arranged behind the inner frame and supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. there is

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion 23, and a speaker unit 24 for outputting sound effects according to the game situation.
, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21 .

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and aligns them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 4). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general prize winning port 35, an upper operation port (first start ball entry portion) 36, and a lower operation port (second start ball entry portion) 37 provided at each opening.
, a variable winning device 38 , and an outlet 39 . The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing. moreover,
The game board 31 has a variable winning through gate 50 provided on the right side of the central portion.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of game balls,
These detection sensors 40 a to 40 d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31 . Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 40a, the upper operating opening 36 includes a detecting sensor 40b, the lower operating opening 37 includes a detecting sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 includes a detecting sensor 40
d. The pachinko machine 10, based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d,
A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 37. - 特許庁The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 4) for detecting entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 4) for detecting an entry of a game ball. In addition, pachinko machine 1
At 0, when a ball enters each through gate 41, no prize ball is paid out, unlike when a ball enters a prize winning opening.
The variable prize-winning thru gate 50 includes a detection sensor 40g (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball. When a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Also, entering the through gate 41 and the variable winning through gate 50 means that the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 and the variable prize winning through gate 50 is also referred to as a prize in the same manner as the ball entering various prize winning openings.

The upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 31 . Each operating port 36, 37 is opened upward to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is the electric accessory 37a.
The lower working port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation port 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. In addition, the electric accessory 37
When a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessary 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation opening 36 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower It may be configured to switch between the operation port 37 and the state in which the game ball is likely to win. In addition, the lower working port 3
7 does not perform such switching by setting the electric accessory 37a, but the lower operation port 3
7 may be used, and in the case of such a configuration, the lower operating port 37 may not be provided with the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an open/close door 38b. A variable winning driving unit 38c is provided.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 includes a transparent (or translucent) transparent panel 381a so that the variable winning device 38 can be visually recognized from the front side, and the transparent panel 381a.
and an opaque panel 381b which is provided around the perimeter and formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can use the variable winning device 38 through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21.
can be seen from the front.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. 31, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

The variable prize-winning thru gate 50 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery,
When it shifts to the opening and closing execution mode, it is a trigger to start the round game. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, the opening/closing door 3
8b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.
Thus, in the present embodiment, the variable winning thru gate 50 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters, the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) game (round game) It functions as a specific entry means that starts the

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a character object display unit 46, and includes a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display device, and other display devices. arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 4). When the main display unit 45 is in the opening/closing execution mode (or in the opening/closing execution mode),
A round display section for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode may be further provided.

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. after that,
The pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. after that,
The pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In this way, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as starting ball entry means for performing an internal lottery upon entry of the game ball while allowing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and character object display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. In addition, as patterns to be variably displayed on the main display section 45 and the accessory display section 46,
A configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, or a configuration for switching and displaying a plurality of types of colors can be employed.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43
A center frame 48 is provided so as to surround 7. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
In this way, the symbol display device 47 is a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. function as
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, and a pattern display. a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47;

The first reservation lamp part 49a is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
Note that each of the holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a portion of the pattern display device 47, which will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, 8 kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. In addition, in FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from when the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 until the predetermined stop result is displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 47 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90,
A display control device 100 is provided, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. again,
The pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power supply and launch control for executing launch control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and devices 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 stores the ROM 6
3 and RAM 64, as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, etc., are integrated into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data.
It is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. This ROM 63 includes a success/failure table storage area 63a and a distribution table storage area 63a.
3b and various areas such as reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 includes various counter areas 64
a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electrical holding area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g. The output ports of the MPU 62 are the power failure monitoring board 65 and the payout control device 70
, and the sound emission control device 90 . In addition, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, and a variable winning device 38.
It is connected to the variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the open/close door 38b, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the open state, MP
The U62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes display control of the character object display unit 46 to display each through gate 4
Displays the results of an internal lottery based on winning 1.

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40a to 40g detect the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, various winning ports of the variable winning device 38, the out port 39, the variable winning through gate 50, and each through gate 41. are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each other. The MPU 62 detects the detection sensor 40a
Based on the detection result of ˜40g, the prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to various prize winning ports, the out port 39, the variable winning through gate 50, and each through gate 41 is performed. In addition, MPU6
2 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS and C3. Specifically, the MPU 62
A big win random number counter C1 is used for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, and a big win type counter C2 is used for the lottery for the type of the big win when the big win occurs. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display duration time on the main display section 45. FIG. Furthermore, the MPU
62 uses the electric accessary product open counter C3 for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessary product 37a of the lower operation port 37 is to be in the electric role open state. Each counter C1, C2, CINI, CS, C3 is R
It is provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 4) of the AM 64. FIG.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C3 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 3
7 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided as acquired information storage means in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C3 is stored in the electric role holding area 64c (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4
is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. The MPU 62 stores sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 as reservation information in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 in chronological order. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 changes the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→
The hold information is stored chronologically in the order of the third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4.

As described above, since the first result display portion reservation area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation opening 36 are reserved. again,
The reserve area Ra for the first result display section has storage areas for writing the reserve numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4
is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. The MPU 62 stores sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 as reservation information in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 in chronological order. Specifically, the MPU 62 selects the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession.
The hold information is stored chronologically in the order of the third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. again,
The reservation area Rb for the second result display section has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. Therefore, each through gate 41
Winning of game balls to is reserved up to a maximum of four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C3 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C3 adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250, thereby becoming a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the electric accessary product release counter C3 stored in the electrical service reservation area 64c.
Based on the value of , a lottery (electric accessory open lottery) is executed as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is to be in the electric role open state.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5). however,
Compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state more times when the electric role open state is won, and sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state. The opening hours are also longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is 1
It is shorter than the open time of the times. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operating port 37 is higher than the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, the number of times to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state,
By combining each condition of the open time and the secured time, the high frequency support mode is configured to relatively increase the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state compared to the low frequency support mode. good too.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . In addition, the jackpot random number counter C1, every loop, the random number initial value counter CINI at that time
value is read as the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is
Or at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operation port 37, R through the lottery counter buffer
It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the AM64. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C
The value of 1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper working port 36, and the second result display in the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the lower working port 37. It is stored in the reserved reservation area Rb for the department.
Then, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.
Based on the value of 1, a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (lottery for winning or not) is executed.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a success/failure table storing values of random numbers for winning a big win.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the hit/fail table storage area 6 of the ROM 63 provided as hit/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG.
3a (see FIG. 4) as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a jackpot.
and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. The success/failure table includes a success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is.
On the other hand, under the game state in which the win/fail table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Here, "jackpot winning" stored in the success/failure table for the low probability mode
The value of the random number that becomes is included in the value of the random number that becomes the "jackpot win" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win win" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the "special off result (small hit result)",
It has two types of outliers: "Normal outlier". All of these outliers are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Specifically, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to when the lottery for the occurrence of the big win is made, the random number value for the "special loss result" is 28, as shown in FIG. 6(a). is one.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is one. Here, the values of the random numbers that become the "special unsuccessful results" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode include the values of the random numbers that become the "special unsuccessful results" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. not present.
The value of the random number stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode that becomes the "special failure result" includes the value of the random number that becomes the "special failure result" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. good too.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is
Or at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operation port 37, R through the lottery counter buffer
It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the AM64. Specifically, jackpot type counter C
The value of 2 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper working port 36, and the second result is displayed in the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the lower working port 37. It is stored in the reserved reservation area Rb for the department.
Then, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot type counter C stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.
Based on the value of 2, when a big win occurs, a lottery (distribution lottery) for the type of the big win is executed.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 7, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 7A, includes "low-probability results (special distribution results for low-probability)", "small-round high-probability results (high-probability results for few-rounds)", and a plurality of distribution results of "Most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 19” are distributed to “low round high Probable result", "20
~ 29” are sorted into the “Most Advantageous Result”.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 7(b), has two distribution results of "low probability result" and "best result" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to
29” is sorted into the “Most Advantageous Result”.
In this embodiment, the two distribution results of the "low probability result" and the "best result" are particularly the jackpot results.

Each sorting result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
The "few-round high-probability result" and "most advantageous result" are sorting results in which the win-fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "few-round high-probability result" and the "best result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the variation type counter CS is
Each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value of 198, it returns to 0, forming a loop counter that loops within the range of 0-198.
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display continuation time on the main display section 45 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 performs steps S101 to S10 as shown in FIG.
5 is periodically executed (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 uses a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g
, the state is determined and stored in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. MP
U62, when it is determined that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of game balls, sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, the MPU 62 is the variable winning device 3
When it is determined that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to 8 detects the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the specific unit number, is transmitted to the payout control device 70. .
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C3. Specifically, the MPU62
adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C3, and updates the values after updating in a predetermined area of the RAM 64, as described above. store in the lottery counter buffer. Note that the MPU
62 resets the values of the counters C1 to C3 back to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C3 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90, based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62, the third
The holding lamp part 49c is turned on. Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 49c is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In addition, in the winning process for through, the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 when it is determined that the detection sensor 40g corresponding to the through gate 50 for variable winning has detected the winning of the game ball. . This round game execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50 .

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working port, the MPU 62 performs steps S201 to S2 as shown in FIG.
07 is executed.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper working port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper working port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S202, the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is grasped, and the reserved number is determined. The number is the first start holding storage number Ra
N is set in a predetermined storage area in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the lower working opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is the second
It is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display section reservation area Rb as the number RbN of start-up reservation storage. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number of start suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N of start pending memories is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N of start suspension memories is less than the upper limit value, in step S206,
1 is added to the value of the start pending memory number N and updated.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores the combination of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area for the result display section, that is, In step S206, it is stored as suspension information in a storage area corresponding to the number N of start suspension storages updated.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process
and a set of values of the jackpot type counter C2 in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first result display section holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start holding storage number RaN updated in step S206 store as hold information in For example, the MPU 62
If "3" is set to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the fourth area Ra4 corresponding to "4" of the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206 is stored. Store hold information in .

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process The hold information is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second result display portion hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. For example, MPU6
2, when "3" is set to the second start suspension memory number RbN in step S204,
The hold information is stored in the fourth area Rb4 corresponding to "4" of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90, based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62, the first
The reserve lamp portion 49a or the second reserve lamp portion 49b is turned on. In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 or the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of four pieces, and the first reservation lamp portion 49a or the second reservation lamp portion 49b is this reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62
As shown in FIG. 10, steps S301 to S314 are executed. Specifically, the MPU62
executes steps S301 to S309 periodically at a cycle of 4 msec, repeats steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time has elapsed, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize ball command is set,
When it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 7
Send to 0. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the command for that effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 47, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90, based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62,
Demonstration display execution processing is started.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, let the start waiting period be 30 sec,
When the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 6
2 determines that the start waiting period has elapsed when the number of executions of the process in step S305 is counted and reaches 7500 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the lower working port 37 . In this electronic support process,
The MPU 62 stores the electric accessory release counter C
Based on the value of 3, the electric accessory open lottery is executed, and when the electric accessory open lottery is won, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. in particular,
The power/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 stores a power failure flag storage area (not shown) in the RAM 64.
determines whether or not the power failure flag is set. This power failure flag is the N
It is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitor board 65 to the MI terminal. The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing of step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, whether the current normal process has It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310 the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred,
By executing 301 again, the next normal processing is started.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a sub-side control board (such as the control board of the audio light emission control device 90) to become operable for a predetermined period of time (for example, 50 minutes after the power is turned on).
0 msec) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, it executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM judgment value is judged to be normal, and if they do not match, the RA
The M judgment value is judged to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal,
The process after step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. allow processing to occur,
It shifts to the normal processing described above.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally.
Perform self initialization.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 performs steps S501 to S50 as shown in FIG.
8.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. M.
If the PU 62 determines in step S501 that the game is in the open/close execution mode, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, in step S502 it determines whether the main display section 45 is performing variable display.
That is, it is determined whether or not the game round is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progressing process in steps S506 to S508.

First, the processing for starting a game cycle in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 performs steps S601 to S61 as shown in FIG.
1.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. In step S601, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending storage number RbN.
is less than or equal to "0", data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 is executed, and in step S601 the second start suspension memory number RbN is "0".
If it is determined that it is not below, the data setting process for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, the MPU 62 operates on the lower working port 37
When it is determined that there is reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36, the first result is displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 Reservation area R for second result display section regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in section reservation area Ra
The hold information stored in b is preferentially set for completion of the game cycle.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2.
The pending information in the area Ra4 is shifted to the third area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is set to the first result display section 45 when completing a game cycle.
This is a flag for specifying which of the main display section 45, a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, and sends the set shift command to the sound emission control device 9.
0 to end the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90
, along with the decrease in the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation port 36, the first reservation lamp portion 49a
reduce the number of lights on.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2.
The pending information in the area Rb4 is shifted to the third area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, and sends the set shift command to the sound emission control device 9.
0 to end the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90
, with the decrease in the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower operation port 37, the second reserved lamp portion 49b
reduce the number of lights on.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 performs steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
to run.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 6A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 6B) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this propriety determination process, the MPU 62
By comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or step S703, the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure) is determined. In addition, as mentioned above, the winning result is "jackpot winning", "
It is either "special loss result" or "ordinary loss result", and it is the same regardless of whether the lottery mode is the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", it executes the processing from step S706 onwards. , step S
712 and subsequent steps are executed.

First, in step S705, the processing (processing after step S706) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the first result display section 4 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36
5a indicates that the variable display is started, so in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 7A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 is displayed.
Since it indicates that the result display unit 45b starts the variable display, the second distribution table (see FIG. 7B) is stored in the distribution table storage area 63 of the ROM 63 in step S708.
Read from b.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62
The result of the distribution lottery (distribution result) is determined by comparing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708.

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 displays the first
Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b is determined according to the distribution result determined in step S709, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 6.
Store in 4. Here, the MPU 62 uses the distribution result determined in step S709 and the R
By comparing with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the OM 63, the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is determined. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the sorting result is a "low-probability result", it sets a low-probability result flag and sets a "low-probability result"
If it identifies that the
, then set the best result flag. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S712) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/loss result is not "big win winning" in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is the "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S712. , the process after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 displays the first
Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the result display section 45 a or the second result display section 45 b is determined, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 is a ROM
By referring to the stop result table for the special failure result stored in advance in 63, the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 is determined. The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result" by referring to this special loss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . where MPU
62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to a stopping result table for abnormal results stored in advance in the ROM 63 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting the display duration (display duration) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 .

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the symbol display device 47 will display the ready-to-win state. Specifically, the MPU 62 generates a ready-to-win display when the winning result determined in step S704 is "big win winning" and when the winning result determined in step S704 is "special losing result". Then judge.

This ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when "big win" or "special loss result" is obtained in the lottery.
Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having a number of is stopped on the activated line L. In addition, when "big win winning" is obtained in the winning lottery and "low probability result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the effective line L.

In addition, when a "special loss result" is obtained in the winning lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of the symbols of the ready-to-win display (a single number and a plurality of identical numbers different from this number) as a stop result. symbol combination) is stopped on the activated line L.
Furthermore, in the case of "big win winning" in the winning lottery and "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the pattern display device 47 displays the combination of the symbols of the ready-to-win display on the effective line L. After temporarily stopping display, the stop result is not a combination of symbols with the same number or a combination of symbols with reach display, but it will be selected in the case of a "normal result" in the winning lottery. A combination of special symbols having numbers different from each other is stopped on the activated line L.

Reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (
In the winning lottery, it becomes a "jackpot election", and in the distribution lottery, the "best result" or "
If it is distributed to "low probability result"), when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery ), and when the combination of symbols in the reach display is finally stopped and displayed (when a "special loss result" occurs in the winning lottery). Further, the ready-to-win display does not occur when a combination different from any of the above-described combinations is finally stopped and displayed (when a "normal result" is obtained in the winning lottery).

The ready-to-win display mode is a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z1 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.
Some of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) out of Z3 are stopped and displayed on the activated line L to display the same combination of symbols to indicate the stop result, and in that state. The rest of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the ready-to-win display, the pachinko machine 10, after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, in the winning lottery "
It is possible to make the player expect that he/she has won a "big win" and has been sorted into a "low probability result" or "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will be displayed in the case of "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or "
It is an expectation performance that makes it easier to produce a performance than the case where a ``special loss result'' instead of a ``jackpot win'' results in a success or failure lottery without a ``jackpot win'' and a ``normal loss result''. . This advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate instead of making the effect more likely to occur, or may be combined.
A lottery as to whether or not to generate the advance notice display is executed by the sound emission control device 90 .

The form of the notice display is a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.
3, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, a part of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, and then a plurality of symbol rows (for example, the symbol Column Z2, Z
3) is variably displayed or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character or the like is displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the change type counter obtained from the change type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach display table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 The display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is stored in various counter areas 6 of RAM 64.
A display continuation time counter provided in 4a is set.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the ROM 6
By referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of 3, the display duration corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired from the fluctuation type counter buffer is determined, The determined display continuation time is set in the display continuation time counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 36 increases. Then, the display duration time when the hold information related to the lower operation port 37 is digested is
It is set so as to become shorter as the number of reserved pieces related to the lower operation port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

At step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the command for variation is
It does not contain information on whether or not a reach indication occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs is not included in the variation command, the sound emission control device 9, which is the sub-side control device, is based on the information on the display duration time.
At 0, it is possible to determine whether or not a reach indication occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to sorting results. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "low probability result", "few rounds high probability result", and "best result" as information related to the sorting result.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command contains information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, when the game round is completed, based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working hole 36,
Since it indicates that the first result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 4
5a starts the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, when the game round is completed, based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37,
Since it indicates that the second result display section 45b starts the variable display, the second result display section 4
5b starts the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S508 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. When it is determined that the main display section 45 is performing variable display, step S50
6 to S508, the processing for game round progress is executed.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. note that,
The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this variable display processing,
The MPU 62 updates the display of the main display section 45 during the variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 causes the main display section 45 to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display.
display control. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game arcade or the like will not be able to
By viewing 5, the game result can be confirmed. According to this, the manager of the game hall, for example, behaves in the same way as when winning a lottery for generating a big win.
It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that is intended to be performed by 0 is being performed.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 performs steps S801 to S8, as shown in FIG.
16.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S812 onward.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the success/failure result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the success/failure result is "
It is determined whether it is a jackpot winning or a special losing result.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the big winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", i.e., if it determines that the win/loss result is the "jackpot winning", in step S806, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S807 the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". In addition, the MPU 62, step S80
If it is determined in step S808 that the distribution result is not a high-probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, if it is determined that the distribution result is a "low-probability result" or a "most advantageous result", in step S808, the round counter RC is set to "15". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
In the opening/closing number regulation mode, the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times.
Alternatively, it ends on the condition that a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning hole 38a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing any of the processes of steps S805, S807, and S808, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S809. "
1000”. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S810, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter WT provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "50000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game.
” is set. The value set in the timer counter WT is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the round game is 1
00 sec. It should be noted that the waiting time for the round game is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S811, MPU62 clears the round game execution flag memorize|stored in RAM64. In other words, the MPU 62 performs step S before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.
The round game execution flag set in the RAM 64 is cleared in the through winning process of 104 .
Also, in step S811, the MPU 62 sets an opening execution flag in the RAM 64. FIG. This opening execution flag is a flag for specifying that the opening/closing execution mode has been entered and the round game can be started with the entry of the ball into the variable prize-winning through gate 50 as a trigger.
After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S812) when it is determined that the MPU 62 is in the opening/closing execution mode in step S801 will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, and determines whether or not the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S812 and determines that the value of the timer counter WT is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812, or determines that the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less, step S813 , the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 performs steps S901 to S9 as shown in FIG.
24.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the big winning opening 38a is open in step S901, it executes the processing from step S906.

First, in step S901, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines that the value of the open/close counter SOC is less than or equal to "0",
Also, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, in step S903, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S904, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
In the following, a detailed description will be given of the big winning opening opening process in step S904.

<Grand Prize Opening Processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 performs steps S1001 to S, as shown in FIG.
1010 is executed.
In step S<b>1001 , the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening execution flag is set in the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the opening execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1004.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the opening execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1001, it sets an opening command in step S1002. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S1002 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

In step S<b>1003 , the MPU 62 clears the opening execution flag stored in the RAM 64 . In other words, the MPU 62 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, starts the round game with the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger, and then issues the opening command only when the large winning opening opening process is executed for the first time. set.

After step S1003 is executed, or if it is determined in step S1001 that the opening execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the processing after step S1004 is executed.
In step S1004, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1004 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1005, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1006, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1004 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1007, it sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1008, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1008 that the result of allocation is the low-round high-probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1006.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1008 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, in step S1009, the timer counter T is set to "150
00” is set. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1006 or step S1009, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 38a in step S1010. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1005 or step S1007 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1006 or step S1009 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62, as described above, the timer counter T
is set to "85" or "15000" to set two different upper limit duration times. Specifically, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit duration to 30 sec for a long time mode (long term mode), and sets the upper limit duration to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long time mode.
A short-time mode (short-term mode) set to sec is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 launches the game ball shooting mechanism 8 at a cycle of 0.6 sec.
By energizing one solenoid, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is made to shoot a game ball. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing period of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S905 will be explained with reference to FIG.
MPU62, after executing the big winning a prize opening processing of step S904, step S905
, set the open command. In addition, the MPU 62 performs normal processing in step S301.
, the open command set in step S905 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90, based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62,
It recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S906) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S901 will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1006 or step S1009 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S918.

First, processing (processing after step S907) when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 38a. It should be noted that determination of whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 38a, in step S908, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S910 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90, based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62,
It recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S923, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S913.
In step S913, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S914, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S915. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening waiting time is 1 sec.
is c. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

In response to this, the MPU 62 sets the value of the round counter RC to "0" in step S914.
', the process after step S916 is executed.
In step S916, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S917, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. MPU62
transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S918) when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the win/loss result is not the "special losing result", that is, if it determines that the win/loss result is a "big hit", step S921
Execute the following processes.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S923.

First, the process (process after step S921) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" in step S920 will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S922, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S915 described above.
In response to this, the MPU 62 sets the value of the round counter RC to "0" in step S922.
', the above-described processing after S916 is executed.

Next, the process (process after step S923) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result" in step S912 or step S920 will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 sets the value of the open/close counter SOC to "0" in step S924.
If it is determined to be below, the above-described processing from S916 onwards is executed.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S814 will be described with reference to FIG.
MPU62, after executing the big winning opening opening and closing process of step S813, step S814
, it is determined whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S814 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S814 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0",
5, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S815 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S815 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S816, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result", the processing from step S1102 onwards is executed.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1105.

First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result" will be described.
At step S1102, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

At step S1103, the MPU 62 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big win" is won in the winning lottery when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

At step S1104, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 64. FIG. When the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62
maintain this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low-probability result flag, low-probability result flag, few-round high-probability result flag, and most advantageous result flag) in the RAM 64 according to the sorting result. Or clear the special out flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. there is

Next, the processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 62 determines whether the sorting result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (when it determines that the win-or-fail result is the "special failure result"), it ends the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the sorting result is the "low-probability result", it executes the processing after step S1106.

In step S1106, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is
At least, it continues until "big hit winning" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than "low probability result".

In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.
In step S1109, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
The MPU 62 maintains the number limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. MPU 62 is 1
When 00 games have been played, the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery becomes a "best result" or a "few rounds high probability result", the game state is the current game. Regardless of the state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), it shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 62, in step S812 of the game state transition processing, RA
When it is determined that the round game execution flag is set in M64, step S8
13, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. In other words, the game state transition process is
After shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the PU 62, it functions as a specific control starting section that starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode with the entry of a ball into the variable prize-winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 38 has an open state (a state in which the open/close door 38b is set to an open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered. It has a closed state (a state in which the open/close door 38b is set to a closed state), and functions as open/close ball entry means for paying out a predetermined game ball when a game ball is entered.
In the game state transition processing, one game (round game) in the open/close execution mode is performed after the variable winning device 38 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again.

Further, in this embodiment, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" at step S812 of the game state transition processing, it executes the big winning opening opening/closing processing at step S813. ing. In other words, in the game state transition process, the game in the opening/closing execution mode is started when 100 sec (specific time) has elapsed after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the MPU 62 .
In the present embodiment, the game state transition process starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode when 100 sec (specific time) has elapsed after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the MPU 62. However, the game in the opening/closing execution mode may be started when a different time has passed, or the game in the opening/closing execution mode may not be started when the specific time has passed. For example, in the game state transition processing, after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the MPU 62, the game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and the variable winning through gate 50 (specific ball entry means) is A game in the opening/closing execution mode may be started with the entry of a ball into other means such as a different out port 39 as a trigger, and the entry into the other means of entry and the elapse of a specific time are used in combination. good too. At this time, if all the ball entry means provided in the game area are replaced with other ball entry means, the gaming machine can start a game in a specific control state triggered by the shooting of the game ball into the game area. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10, in the low-probability mode, has a left-handed route (first route) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, and an upper operating route. Equipped with a right-handed route (second route) that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the opening 36 and the lower operating port 37 compared to the left-handed route, and the variable prize-winning through gate 50 is designed for the right-handed route. are arranged.
In the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50 is arranged on the right-handed route, but may be arranged on the left-handed route.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 19, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data.
It is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. This ROM 93 has various areas such as a reach table storage area 93a.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG.
The MPU 92 operates various lamp units 23 based on commands transmitted from the main controller 60.
, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 are controlled.
In addition, the MPU 92 outputs the command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 10.
Send to 0. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 has a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104
In addition, it is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90, and
Based on this command, predetermined arithmetic processing is performed to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, the MPU 102 generates commands for the VDP 105 to
05 control is executed.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . This character ROM 106
holds bitmap format image data of various patterns and a color palette table and the like to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 executes step S1201 as shown in FIG.
˜S1205 are periodically executed (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S1201, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . In addition, MPU9
2 reads commands from the ring buffer according to the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1202, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like.
In step S1203, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S1202. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24. FIG.

In step S<b>1204 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S1205, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing in step S1202 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1315 as shown in FIG.

In step S1301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1309 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has been received, in step S1302, based on the content of the type command, the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result". result”.

The MPU 92, in step S1302, determines that the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result".
If it is determined as such, in step S1303, symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result is executed. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S1304, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not it is “Few Rounds High Probability Result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", in step S1305, it executes common symbol determination processing. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects different numbers that will not be selected in the case of a "normal failure result" in the winning lottery, instead of a combination of symbols having the same number or a combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display. Determine the special symbol combination (eg, "3, 4, 1") that you have.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is not the "few rounds high probability result", in step S1306, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for the losing result. In this outlier result symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display occurs when determining that the game result is a “special loss result”,
When it is determined that the game result is the "out of normal result", it is determined that the ready-to-win display does not occur.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S1303, S1305, and S1306, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S1307. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S1307, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

In addition, the MPU 92, based on the selected production pattern, the above-mentioned step S1203
In the effect execution processing of 1, light emission control of the display lamp section 23 is executed, and voice control of the speaker section 24 is executed.

In step S1308, the MPU 92 issues a change start command, steps S1303,
A stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in either step S1305 or step S1306 is set. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1308, or when it is determined in step S1301 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92
The processing after 1309 is executed.
In step S1309, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1315.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that the opening command has been received, in step S1310, whether the effect duration time selected in the effect pattern determination process in step S1307 has elapsed. determine whether or not

When the MPU 92 determines that the effect continuation time has elapsed in step S1310,
The process after step S1312 is executed.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1310 that the effect continuation time has not passed, in step S1311 the effect end process is executed. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307.

After executing the process of step S1311, or when it is determined that the effect duration time has elapsed in step S1310, the MPU 92 determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command in step S1312.

In step S1313, the MPU 92 executes processing for determining the opening/closing execution mode effect corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1312. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when determining that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312. Also, MPU9
In 2, when it is determined that the game result is a "few rounds high probability result", the effect B is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. In addition, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92, based on the selection result of the effects A to D, the above-mentioned step S12
03, the light emission control of the display lamp section 23 is executed, and the sound control of the speaker section 24 is executed.

In step S1314, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S1313. And MPU9
2 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94; This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 4
7 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S1314, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1315 and subsequent steps.
In step S1315, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG.
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the “normal result” and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 10 displays "
It has hit/fail results of "big win win" and "special failure result", and distribution results of "few round high probability result", "most favorable result" and "low probability result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 22, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the win/loss lottery (symbol x in the figure). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift. In addition, in the "special failure result", the stop result is a combination of ready-to-win display symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. In addition, the support mode does not shift in the "special outlier result".

In the "few round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of times being two, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. . In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "few-round high-probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, "small round high accuracy result"
Then, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode.
Therefore, the player can grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "few rounds high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times in a long time mode. times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode,
The effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If it becomes
The effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode effect is
It becomes the production D. Additionally, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the "best result". can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, so that the game result is the "best result". and "low-probability results" cannot be grasped.

Then, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, if the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 47 displays an image indicating that the high probability mode is on the display screen G.
do not display in

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image indicating that the high probability mode is on the display screen G, and in the high frequency support mode, the game round is the end reference number of times (specifically,
100 times) is reached, an image is displayed on the display screen G to notify that the mode will be shifted to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 will cause the opening/closing execution mode effect to be the final effect D in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends. If so, the game result is camouflaged as if it were a "low-probability result".

Then, when the sorting result is the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 does not become a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and is in the high probability mode after 100 game rounds are completed. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 performs step S1 of the effect determination process.
At 307, a production pattern determination process is executed. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1404 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display.
Specifically, the MPU 92, based on the content of the command for variation, determines if the game result is a "most advantageous result", a "low probability result", a "few rounds high probability result", or a "special unsuccessful result". It is determined to generate the ready-to-win display, and when the game result is "out of normal result", it is determined not to generate the ready-to-win display.

When the MPU 92 determines to generate the ready-to-win display in step S1401,
In step S1402, setting processing of the production duration time for ready-to-win generation is executed. In this ready-to-win effect duration setting process, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 as the effect duration time. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 stores the ROM 9
The performance duration time is set by referring to the performance duration table for reach occurrence stored in the table storage area 93a for reach 3. This ready-to-win effect duration table stores a plurality of ready-to-win indications and a plurality of effect duration times respectively corresponding to the plurality of ready-to-win indications in association with each other.
Here, the duration of the ready-to-win display is the total time of the display duration included in the variation command and the presentation duration.

In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter than the wait time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 as the presentation duration time. The same time as the time may be set as the presentation continuation time, or a longer time than the standby time for the round game may be set as the presentation continuation time. Moreover, the MPU 92 may set the effect duration time so that the ready-to-win display is continued without ending. In this case, the ready-to-win display is performed by, for example, slowing down the image, repeating the image, or stopping the image and making the player hit the push button repeatedly to extend the effect of the ready-to-win display. may be configured.

After executing step S1402, the MPU 92 executes reach display setting processing in step S1403. In this ready-to-win display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets a ready-to-win display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1402.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 that the ready-to-win display does not occur, in step S1404, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the effect continuation time for no-to-win. In the process of setting the non-reach effect duration time, the MPU 92 sets the same effect duration time as the display duration time included in the variation command.
After executing the process of step S1403 or the process of step S1404, the MPU 92
ends the effect pattern determination process.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of reach display. Specifically, FIG. 24(A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in a state where ready-to-win display is in progress, and FIG.
B) is a view showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 after the effect continuation time has elapsed in the case where the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result", and FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47 after the effect duration time has elapsed in the case where the game result is "few rounds high probability result" or "special loss result"; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the MPU 102 shifts to the ready-to-win display by reducing the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G. . In this ready-to-win display, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them in the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. and fight with the demon that exists on the left side.
In addition to demons, characters that fight with angels are also available. A character who fights with this angel is randomly selected each time the reach display occurs.

The MPU 102 determines whether or not the angel has won the battle after the effect duration time has elapsed.
To inform a player of the result of a winning lottery. Specifically, when the game result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low-probability result”, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG.
By making the angel win when the variable display of Z3 is stopped, the player is notified that the game result is the ``best result'' or ``low probability result''. In addition, when the game result is a “few rounds high probability result” or a “special loss result”, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The player is notified that the game result is a ``few-round high-probability result'' or a ``special out-of-match result'' by making the devil win the game.

<About the flow when the reach display occurs>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the variable prize-winning thru-gate at the occurrence of the ready-to-win display. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning thru gate when the ready-to-win display occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 25A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. Figure 2
5(B) and (D) are display screens G when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50.
It is a figure which shows. 25(C) and (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G after the ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50. FIG.
25(B) and (C) show the display screen G when the game result is the "best result".
, and the same applies when the game result is a "low-probability result". Fig. 25(D), (
E) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is a "special loss result".

FIG. 26A is a timing chart showing the state of the variable display on the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 26B is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the pattern display device 47 (during variable display or stopped). Figure 2
6 (C) is the state of the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball).
is a timing chart showing FIG. 26D is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 25A, reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

Thereafter, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 26A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the performance continuation time, as shown in FIG. 26B, the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812, as shown in FIG.

In addition, the MPU 62 performs step S813 for opening and closing the big winning opening and closing process.
When executing the big winning opening opening process of 904 for the first time, an opening command is set in step S1002. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

Here, when it is determined that the opening command is received in step S1309 before the performance duration time elapses after occurrence of the ready-to-win display, the MPU 92 performs step S13.
At 11, a performance ending process is executed. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307. In other words, M
As shown in FIG. 26(B), the PU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 .
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the ready-to-win display before the effect continuation time elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." It is suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by pressing, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Here, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize them. Therefore, when the ready-to-win display occurs, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the big win has been won. By daringly confirming the display section 45, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player as to whether or not it is confirmed whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the reach display by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Although it is suggested to the player that it can be done, other methods may be used to suggest to the player that the player can hit right and skip the reach indication. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning thru gate 50, and by causing the light emitting means to emit light, it is possible to skip the ready-to-win display by striking to the right. You may suggest to the player.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "best result", it selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Also, MPU9
2 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode when it is determined that the game result is the "low probability result".

Then, when the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and displays the angels as shown in FIG. 25(B). By making the player win, the ready-to-win display is terminated and the player is informed that the game result is the ``best result'' or ``low probability result''.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25(C), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect C or effect D) on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "special loss result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
25 (D
), by stopping the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and making the devil win, the ready-to-win display is ended and the player is notified that the game result is a "special loss result".
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25(E), the MPU 102 displays the effect (effect A) for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 4 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .
7.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the game result is "few rounds, high probability result".
Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Then, when the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 27A, displays the symbol row Z1
Stop the Z3 variable display and let the devil win.

Next, the MPU 102 restarts the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as shown in FIG. 27(B).
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27(C), the MPU 102 ends the ready-to-win display by finally stop-displaying the combination of special symbols, and confirms that the game result is a "few-round high-probability result". is notified to the player, and based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the pattern display device 47 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect B).

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning thru gate when the ready-to-win display occurs. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning thru gate when the ready-to-win display occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 28A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. Figure 2
8(B) is a view showing the display screen G when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50. FIG. FIGS. 28C and 28E are diagrams showing the display screen G when the effect duration time has elapsed. FIGS. 28(D) and (F) are diagrams showing the display screen G after the effect duration time has elapsed.
28(C) and (D) show the display screen G when the game result is the "best result".
, and the same applies when the game result is a "low-probability result". Fig. 25 (E), (
F) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the game result is a "special loss result".

FIG. 29A is a timing chart showing the state of the variable display on the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 29(B) is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the pattern display device 47 (during variable display or stopped). Figure 2
9 (C) is the state of the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball)
is a timing chart showing FIG. 29(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 28A, reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

Thereafter, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 29A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the performance continuation time, as shown in FIGS. 28(B) and 29(B), the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" in step S812 without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813 is executed (timing T3).

Here, after the occurrence of the ready-to-win display, if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50, after the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307 is completed, that is, the ready-to-win display is performed. (timing T13), the MPU 62 performs step S
813 big winning opening opening/closing processing is executed.
In the present embodiment, the standby time for the round game is set to 100 seconds, so if the effect duration is set to 90 seconds, the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 after 10 seconds have elapsed after finishing the ready-to-win display. It will be.

In addition, the MPU 62 performs step S813 for opening and closing the big winning opening and closing process.
When executing the big winning opening opening process of 904 for the first time, an opening command is set in step S1002. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "best result", it selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Also, MPU9
2 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode when it is determined that the game result is the "low probability result".

Then, when the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and displays the angels as shown in FIG. 28(C). By making the player win, the ready-to-win display is terminated and the player is informed that the game result is the ``best result'' or ``low probability result''.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28(D), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect C or effect D) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "special loss result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
28 (E
), by stopping the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and making the devil win, the ready-to-win display is ended and the player is notified that the game result is a "special loss result".
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28(F), the MPU 102 displays an effect (effect A) for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 4 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .
7.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 102 determines that the game result is "
In the same way as in the case of "Special Loss Result", the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and the devil wins (see FIG. 27(A)).

Next, the MPU 102 restarts the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 27(B)).
Thereafter, the MPU 102 terminates the ready-to-win display and notifies the player that the game result is a "few rounds high probability result" by finally stopping and displaying the combination of special symbols. Based on the transmitted command for the opening/closing execution mode, the effect (effect B) for the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the pattern display device 47 (see FIG. 27(C)).
.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 provide an expectation effect that makes the player expect the game state to shift to the opening/closing execution mode (
It functions as an expected performance executing means for executing an expected performance by the pattern display device 47 so that the player expects that the player will be in an advantageous state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the determination processing of the effect pattern is executed by the pattern display device 47 as an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the open/close execution mode. It functions as an executive part.
In the present embodiment, the effect determination process is an expectation effect that terminates the ready-to-win display when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 after shifting the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60. Acts as a terminator.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the ready-to-win display is used as the expected effect, but other expected effects such as advance notice display may be used. In short, the expected effect may be any effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 is the first internal lottery result ( a special winning result), and a big win result (low-probability result and most advantageous result) as a second internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode and gives the player a higher value than the small win result. It has Then, the production pattern determination processing is performed by the upper operation port 3
6 and when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37 and the result of the internal lottery is a small hit result or a big hit result, the pattern display device 47 executes the ready-to-win display.

Specifically, in the internal lottery, the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (2 in this embodiment).
times), a small hit result that shifts the game state to an opening and closing execution mode that can pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and the number of opening and closing times of the variable winning device 38 is set to a number greater than the predetermined number of times (
15 times in this embodiment), by shifting the game state to the open/close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, a value higher than the result of the small win is given to the player. Jackpot results to be awarded (low probability result and most favorable result).
In this embodiment, the second internal lottery result gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed. By setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, etc., a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery may be awarded to the player. In short, the result of the second internal lottery should give the player a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small winning result is set to a predetermined time for one opening and closing time of the variable winning device 38 (short time mode), and the big winning result (low probability result and most advantageous result) is the variable winning device The opening and closing time of 38 is set to a time longer than the predetermined time (long time mode).
Incidentally, in the small winning result, the opening and closing time of the variable winning device 38 may be set to a shorter time than that in the big winning result, or may be set to the same time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is performed by shifting the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the variable winning device 38 is triggered by the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50.
It also functions as an opening/closing frequency notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening/closing times. Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by selecting effects A to D as effects for the opening/closing execution mode.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then terminate the ready-to-win display when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. Since the effect determination processing is provided, the player enters the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50 until the ready-to-win display ends.
The ready-to-win display can be seen even after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode at 0, and the game can be played while enjoying the game.
(2) After the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode, the main controller 60 starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode when the ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50. Since the transition processing is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display and start the game in the open/close execution mode by entering the game ball into the variable prize-winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to see the ready-to-win display, and allows the player to comfortably play the game.

(3) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform a ready-to-win display on the pattern display device 47 as an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Since the pattern determining process is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to see the ready-to-win display, and allows the player to comfortably play the game.
(4) The effect pattern determination process is executed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 and the lower operation opening 37 is a small winning result or a big winning result. Since the display is performed by the symbol display device 47, the player can expect that the result of the internal lottery is a big winning result by performing the ready-to-win display.

(5) The result of a small win can shift the game state to an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the result of a big win is an open/close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. By shifting the game state to , it is possible to give the player a value higher than the result of the small win. It is possible to make the player further expect that there has been.
(6) The results of the small wins are variable. By setting the number of openings and closings of the winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times, the game state can be shifted to an opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the results of the big wins are variable. By setting the number of times of opening and closing the winning device 38 to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state can be shifted to an opening/closing execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out, thus resulting in an effect pattern. In the decision process of (1), by executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was a jackpot result.

(7) The result of the small win is set to a predetermined time for opening and closing the variable winning device 38, and the result of the big win is to set the time to open and close the variable winning device 38 to a time longer than the predetermined time. When the result of the internal lottery is a small win, the pachinko machine 10 can end the game in the opening/closing execution mode more quickly than when the internal lottery results in a big win. , the following internal lottery can be performed: Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(8) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the variable winning device 38 is triggered by the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50. The game player can check the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by entering a game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to check the number of openings and closings of the variable prize winning device 38, so that the player can comfortably play the game.

(9) In the game state transition processing, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing is executed when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 or when a specific time has elapsed. Since the game of the mode is started, the game of the opening/closing execution mode can be started even when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely start the game in the opening/closing execution mode after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60, and the player can play the game comfortably. .
(10) Since the variable prize-winning thru-gate 50 is arranged on the right-handed route, the player can pass the game ball through a path different from the case of entering the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 and the lower operation opening 37. A game ball can enter the variable winning through gate 50 by shooting. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect determination process is performed by shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 60, and then using the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger for the variable winning. It also functions as an opening/closing times notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening/closing times of the device 38 . Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by selecting effects A to D as effects for the opening/closing execution mode.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, the variable winning thru gate 50 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters the game, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 It functions as a notification entry means for notifying users of useful information. In the effect determination process, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger. It functions as a payout information reporting unit.

According to this, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger. Since the player is provided with an effect determination process for notifying the player of the information on the payout of the game ball, the player can confirm the information on the payout of the game ball by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed ("big hit winning" in the winning lottery, "most advantageous result" or " If it is distributed to "low probability result"), when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery ), and when the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display is finally stopped and displayed (when a "special loss result" occurs in the winning lottery).
On the other hand, the ready-to-win display may occur when a game result other than these results is obtained.
This also applies to each of the following embodiments. For example, the reach display should occur when it becomes a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to the "unspecified small round high probability result (latency high probability result for small round)" in the distribution lottery. may The "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" is a sorting result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode.

Specifically, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". Then, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". Then, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends.
The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 30 is a front view of a game board according to the second embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the variable winning through gate 50 provided on the right side of the central portion.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 has a variable winning through gate 50A provided on the left side of the central portion as shown in FIG. 30 instead of the variable winning through gate 50. It is different from the first embodiment in this respect.
The variable winning thru gate 50A has the same function as the variable winning thru gate 50 except for its position.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability mode, the upper operation opening 3
6 and the left-handed route (first route) that easily causes the game ball to enter the lower working port 37, and the entry of the game ball to the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 with the left-handed route. The variable winning thru-gate 50A is arranged on the left-handed route.
In the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50A is arranged on the left-handed route, but may be arranged on the right-handed route.

Further, in the present embodiment, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100
A process different from the embodiment is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game state transition process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the game state transition processing in this embodiment will be described below.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 performs step S80 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment.
1 to S816 are executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 62, as shown in FIG.
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the waiting time setting process of step S809A is executed instead of the process of step S809.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the waiting time setting process.
In the standby time setting process, the MPU 62 performs steps S1501 to S as shown in FIG.
1505 is executed.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that the win/loss result is the "special losing result", in step S1502, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 stores the waiting time for opening (waiting period ) to set the short-term standby time. The value of this short-term standby time is random between "1000" and "10000".
Each time the timer interrupt process is executed, the value set in the timer counter T is increased by 1 from the previous value.
is updated by subtracting Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 sec to 20 sec
becomes.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the success/failure result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the success/failure result is the "big hit", in step S1503, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1503 that the result of distribution is the result of a small number of rounds and high accuracy, in step S1504, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 stores a waiting time for opening (waiting time period) to set the medium-term standby time. The value of this medium-term waiting time is random between "5000" and "20000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 10 sec to 40 s
becomes ec.

In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1503 that the distribution result is not a high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is a "low probability result" or a "best result", step In S1505, a long standby time is set as an opening standby time (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. The value of this long standby time is from "20000" to "50000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 40 sec to 100 sec.

In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 determines that the sorting result is a "low probability result" or a "best result".
If so, in step S1505, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to the same long-term waiting time as the waiting time (waiting period) for opening.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set different waiting times depending on whether the sorting result is determined to be the "best result" or the sorting result is the "low probability result". Well, for example, when it is determined that the sorting result is the "best result", a longer waiting time may be set than when it is determined that the sorting result is the "low probability result".

Further, in the present embodiment, the short-term standby time range and the medium-term standby time range are set to 10 sec.
Although there is overlap in the interval of ~20 sec, and the range of medium-term waiting time and the range of long-term waiting time do not overlap, all these ranges may or may not overlap.
Further, in the present embodiment, the short-term standby time, medium-term standby time, and long-term standby time are set randomly within a predetermined range, but they may be fixed at predetermined values.

<About the flow when the reach display occurs>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning thru gate when the ready-to-win display occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 33A is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 33(B) shows the pattern display device 47.
4 is a timing chart showing the state of variable display (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 33(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable prize-winning through gate 50A (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 33(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped). FIG. 33(E) is a timing chart showing presence or absence of waiting time for opening.

In the case of generating the ready-to-win display, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.
Let the angels on the right side of the and the demons on the left side fight. Also, the MPU 10
2 informs the player of the result of the lottery, depending on whether the angel wins this battle (
See FIG. 25(A)).
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

Thereafter, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 33A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the performance continuation time, as shown in FIG. 33(B), the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. (timing T2). When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813.

However, even if the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812, it does not execute the big winning opening opening process in step S904 until the waiting time for the opening elapses. As shown in FIG. 33(D), the stop of opening/closing is continued, and as shown in FIG. 33(E), when the waiting time for opening has passed, opening/closing is in progress (timing T4).

In addition, the MPU 62 performs step S813 for opening and closing the big winning opening and closing process.
When executing the big winning opening opening process of 904 for the first time, an opening command is set in step S1002. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

Here, when it is determined that the opening command is received in step S1309 before the performance duration time elapses after occurrence of the ready-to-win display, the MPU 92 performs step S13.
At 11, a performance ending process is executed. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307. In other words, M
The PU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 .
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the ready-to-win display before the effect continuation time elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." It is suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by pressing, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Here, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize them. Therefore, when the ready-to-win display occurs, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the big win has been won. By daringly confirming the display section 45, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player as to whether or not it is confirmed whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the reach display by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Although it is suggested to the player that it can be done, other methods may be used to suggest to the player that the player can hit right and skip the reach indication. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning thru gate 50, and by causing the light emitting means to emit light, it is possible to skip the ready-to-win display by striking to the right. You may suggest to the player.

In other words, the MPU 92 continues the ready-to-win display until the waiting time for opening elapses even when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A.
As described above, in the waiting time setting process, the MPU 62 sets a short-term waiting time of 2 sec to 20 sec as the waiting time for the opening when the game result is the "special loss result", and the game result is " If the game result is "few rounds high probability result", a medium waiting time of 10 sec to 40 sec is set as the waiting time for the opening, and if the game result is "best result" or "low probability result" , 40 se as waiting time for opening
Set a long standby time of c to 100 sec.

Therefore, when a ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50A and the game result is a "special loss result", the MPU 92 terminates the ready-to-win display after 2 to 20 seconds, and displays the pattern. The variable display of device 47 will cease. Also, the MPU 92
When a ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50A and the game result is a "few rounds high probability result", the ready-to-win display is finished after 10 to 40 seconds, and the symbol display device 47 is displayed. This will stop the variable display. Further, the MPU 92 displays a ready-to-win state after 40 to 100 seconds have elapsed when a ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50A and the game result is the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result". , and the symbol display device 4
7 will be stopped.

According to this, by allowing the ball to enter the variable prize-winning through gate 50A, the longer the time from the occurrence of the ready-to-win display to the end of the ready-to-win display, the more advantageous the result. When the time until completion of the ready-to-win display exceeds 40 sec, it is possible to recognize that the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result". After the variable display is started at 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player can expect that the game result will be the "best result" or the "low probability result". .

In this embodiment, the MPU 92 terminates the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the pattern display device 47 after the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A and the waiting time for the opening has passed. was
On the other hand, the MPU 92 terminates the ready-to-win display when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A after the waiting time for the opening has passed, and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47. can be

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "best result", it selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Also, MPU9
2 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode when it is determined that the game result is the "low probability result".

Then, when the game result is the “best result” or the “low probability result”, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and causes the angel to win.
The ready-to-win display is ended, and the player is notified that the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result" (see FIG. 25(B)).
Thereafter, the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect C or effect D) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (see FIG. 25(C)).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "special loss result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Then, the MPU 102, when the game result is the "special loss result", the symbol row Z1
By stopping the variable display of ~Z3 and making the devil win, the ready-to-win display is ended and the player is notified that the game result was a "special loss result" (see FIG. 25 (D))
.
After that, the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect A) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (FIG. 25 (E
)reference).

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 102 determines that the game result is "
In the same way as in the case of "Special Loss Result", the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and the devil wins (see FIG. 27(A)).

Next, the MPU 102 restarts the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 27(B)).
Thereafter, the MPU 102 terminates the ready-to-win display and notifies the player that the game result is a "few rounds high probability result" by finally stopping and displaying the combination of special symbols. Based on the transmitted command for the opening/closing execution mode, the effect (effect B) for the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the pattern display device 47 (see FIG. 27(C)).
.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state transition processing and the big winning opening opening/closing processing function as a specific winning ball setting unit that sets the variable winning thru gate 50A to be valid or invalid. Specifically, in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, the variable winning thru gate 50A is disabled until the waiting time for the opening has passed, and after the waiting time for the opening has passed, the variable winning gate 50A is disabled. The winning through gate 50A is set to be valid. In the effect determination process, the variable winning thru-gate 50A is set to valid in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, and the ready-to-win display ends when a ball enters the variable winning thru-gate 50A. I am letting
In the present embodiment, the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process set the variable winning thru gate 50A to be valid or invalid by adjusting the waiting time for the opening. It may be set to enabled or disabled based on other conditions. In short, the specific ball entry setting unit may set the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid.

Further, in the present embodiment, the standby time setting process is such that after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the variable winning through gate 50A is opened in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process. It functions as an invalid period setting unit that sets an invalid period to be invalid. Then, the waiting time setting process is based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 as a trigger, and when the result of the internal lottery is advantageous to the player. sets a longer invalid period than the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Specifically, the waiting time setting process is based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, and the game result is a "special loss result". If there is, the invalid period is set to be longer in the order of the game result of "few rounds with high probability" and the game result of "most advantageous result" or "low probability result".

Note that in the present embodiment, the standby time setting process is performed by various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
Any one of a short-term standby time, a medium-term standby time, and a long-term standby time is set as a standby time (waiting period) for opening in a timer counter T provided in a variable winning through gate 50A. You have set an invalid period.
On the other hand, for example, the waiting time setting process is an internal lottery advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. In the case of the result of (2), by using a conditional expression that sets the invalid period longer than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, the variable winning through gate 5
An invalid period may be set to invalidate 0A.

In short, if the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player is determined based on the result of the internal lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the invalid period setting unit The invalid period may be set longer than in the case of a disadvantageous internal lottery result.
In the present embodiment, the invalid period setting unit, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, if the result of the internal lottery is advantageous to the player, set the invalid period longer than in the case of the result of internal lottery, which is disadvantageous for the player, but it may be set to the opposite relationship, and the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. It may be set regardless of the result of the internal lottery executed with the ball as a trigger.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as (1) to (9) in the first embodiment, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(1) In the effect determination process, the variable winning through gate 50A is enabled in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, and the ready-to-win display is displayed when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. Since it can be ended, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the ready-to-win display. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(2) In the waiting time setting process, in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous to the player, the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, so the ready-to-win display is terminated. The player's sense of expectation can be increased as the timing of the activation is delayed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(3) Since the variable winning thru-gate 50A is arranged on the left-handed route, the player can pass the game ball along the same route as when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. A game ball can be entered into the variable winning through gate 50A by firing. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect determination process is performed by shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 60, and then using the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50A as a trigger for the variable winning. It also functions as an opening/closing times notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening/closing times of the device 38 . Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by selecting effects A to D as effects for the opening/closing execution mode.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, the variable winning thru gate 50A allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters the game, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 It functions as a notification entry means for notifying users of useful information. In the effect determination process, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. It functions as a payout information reporting unit.

According to this, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A as a trigger. The player can check the information on the payout of the game ball by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50A. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10
It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

In this case, the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process function as a notification ball setting section that sets the variable winning through gate 50A to be valid or invalid. Specifically, in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, the variable winning thru gate 50A is disabled until the waiting time for the opening has passed, and after the waiting time for the opening has passed, the variable winning gate 50A is disabled. The winning through gate 50A is set to be valid. In the effect determination process, the variable winning thru gate 50A is enabled in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, and game balls are paid out when the ball enters the variable winning thru gate 50A. to notify the player of information about
In the present embodiment, the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process set the variable winning thru gate 50A to be valid or invalid by adjusting the waiting time for the opening. It may be set to enabled or disabled based on other conditions. In short, the informing ball setting section may set the informing ball entering means to be valid or invalid.

According to this, in the effect determination process, the variable winning through gate 50A is enabled in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, and the game is started when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. Since the player can be notified of the information on the payout of the game balls, the timing of notifying the player of the information on the payout of the game balls can be diversified. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, the waiting time setting process shifts the game state to an open/close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, thereby giving the player a higher value than the small win result. In this case, the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the small hit result that shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out, so that the player is notified of the information on the payout of the game balls. The later the timing, the higher the player's expectation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, game round control processing, game state transition processing, and effect pattern determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the game state transition processing in this embodiment will be described below.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 performs step S501 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment.
to S509 are executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes the process of step S509 after executing the process of step S508.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 is
In step S301 of normal processing, the change end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 9
0 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game cycle without requiring reception of the variable end command.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 performs step S1 of the effect determination process.
At 307, a production pattern determination process is executed. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1606 as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the effect continuation time. In this effect duration setting process, the MPU 92 sets the same effect duration time as the display duration time included in the variation command.

In step S1602, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate reach display.
Specifically, the MPU 92, based on the content of the command for variation, determines if the game result is a "most advantageous result", a "low probability result", a "few rounds high probability result", or a "special unsuccessful result". It is determined to generate the ready-to-win display, and when the game result is "out of normal result", it is determined not to generate the ready-to-win display.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 not to generate the ready-to-win display, it ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S1604.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 to generate the reach display, in step S1603, the MPU 92 executes a reach display setting process. In this ready-to-win display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets a ready-to-win display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1601.

In step S1604, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a promotion effect. More specifically, the MPU 92 generates a promotion effect when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L in step S1303. In other cases, it is determined that the promotion effect is not generated.
In this embodiment, it is determined that a promotion effect is to be generated when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L in step S1303. However, it does not necessarily have to occur, for example,
It may be determined whether or not to generate the promotion effect by drawing lots based on a predetermined probability.

Here, in the promotion effect, it is determined in step S1303 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", and a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L is executed. When such information is determined, it is an effect for replacing this information with information related to a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers.
It should be noted that the promotion effect, when it is determined in step S1303 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", and in step S1303 it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result". occurs even if

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the promotion effect is not generated,
The effect pattern determination process is ended without executing the processes after step S1605.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the promotion effect is to be generated, in step S1605, the MPU 92 executes setting processing of the promotion effect.

In the promotion effect setting process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to replace the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number with the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same odd number. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines in step S1303 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", and the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L is determined. When the information related to is determined, it is decided to replace the information related to the combination of symbols having the same even number with a probability of 50% with the information related to the combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the remaining 50% It is decided not to replace the information related to the combination of symbols having the same even number with the information related to the combination of symbols having the same odd number with a probability of .
Further, in the promotion effect setting process, the MPU 92 selects one of the promotion effects stored in the ROM 93 .

In step S1606, the MPU 92 executes extension processing of the effect duration time. In this effect duration extension process, the MPU 92 extends the effect duration time set in step S1601. Specifically, the MPU 92 resets the effect duration to the total time of the effect duration set in step S1601 and the promotion effect duration set in the promotion effect setting process of step S1605. .
Here, the duration of the promotion effect is slightly shorter than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 (for example, 90 sec).

In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time as the duration of the promotion effect than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above. The same time as the waiting time of (1) may be set as the duration of the promotion performance, or a time longer than the waiting time for the round game may be set as the duration of the promotion performance.

<About the flow when promotion production occurs>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flow when a ball enters a variable prize-winning through gate at the time of promotion performance.
Specifically, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the ready-to-win display. Figure 3
6(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the promotion effect is generated. FIGS. 36(C) and (D) are
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display screen G when a ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50. FIG.

FIG. 36(C) shows that when information related to a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, this information is displayed with the same odd-numbered number. is a diagram showing a display screen G when replaced with information related to a combination of symbols having . FIG. 36(D) shows that, when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L is determined, this information is displayed as the same odd number. is a diagram showing a display screen G when not replaced with information related to a combination of symbols having .

FIG. 37A shows the variable display state (
10 is a timing chart showing a variable display (during variable display, or variable display stopped). FIG. 37(B) shows
It is a timing chart which shows the state (during execution or execution stop) of execution of promotion production|presentation. FIG. 37(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 37(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the promotion effect is to be generated, the MPU 102 terminates the ready-to-win display as shown in FIG. 36(A).
Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the display continuation time has passed in step S506, the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped as shown in FIG. (Timing T1).
Further, the MPU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

After finishing the ready-to-win display, as shown in FIGS. 36(B) and 37(B), each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is enlarged and arranged at the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, By restarting the variable display of the pattern display device 47, promotion performance is executed. Also, MPU1
02 is the line of an angel present at the bottom of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, "Re-lottery!!
is displayed, the player is informed that the promotion effect has been generated. The duration of this promotion effect is the duration of the promotion effect set in the process of setting the promotion effect in step S1605, that is, the time from timing T1 to timing T5 (see two-dot chain line in FIG. 37B). there is
Further, when executing a promotion effect, the MPU 102 displays the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.
By displaying the devil's line "You can skip with right-handed hitting" present in the upper right of the game, it is suggested to the player that he can skip the promotion performance by hitting right-handedly.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812, as shown in FIG.

In addition, the MPU 62 performs step S813 for opening and closing the big winning opening and closing process.
When executing the big winning opening opening process of 904 for the first time, an opening command is set in step S1002. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

Here, when it is determined that the opening command is received in step S1309 before the duration of the promotion effect elapses after the promotion effect occurs, the MPU 92 proceeds to step S1309.
At 1311, an effect ending process is executed. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the promotion effect.
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the promotion effect before the continuation time of the promotion effect elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Although it is suggested to the player that the promotion effect can be skipped by pressing, it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the promotion effect can be skipped by hitting to the right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the promotion effect by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" which is present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. suggesting to players that they can, but in other ways,
It may be suggested to the player that he can skip the promotion effect by hitting right. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning thru gate 50, and by causing the light emitting means to emit light, it is possible to skip the promotion effect by striking to the right. You may suggest to the player.

When the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, the MPU 92 converts this information to a combination of symbols having the same odd number. When the information is replaced with such information, the effect C is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36(C), the MPU 102 displays an effect (effect C) for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 4 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .
7. At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number at the lower left of the display screen G as a stop result.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, the MPU 92 transfers this information to symbols having the same odd number. If the information related to the combination is not replaced, the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36(D), the MPU 102 displays the effect (effect D) for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 4 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .
7. At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number at the lower left of the display screen G as a stop result.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning thru-gate when the promotion effect occurs. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the ready-to-win display. Figure 3
8(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the promotion effect is generated. FIGS. 38(C) and (D) are
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G when a ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50. FIG.

FIG. 38(C) shows that when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, this information is displayed with the same odd-numbered number. is a diagram showing a display screen G when replaced with information related to a combination of symbols having . FIG. 38(D) shows that, when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, this information is displayed with the same odd-numbered number. is a diagram showing a display screen G when not replaced with information related to a combination of symbols having .

FIG. 39(A) shows the variable display state (
10 is a timing chart showing a variable display (during variable display, or variable display stopped). FIG. 39(B) shows
It is a timing chart which shows the state (during execution or execution stop) of execution of promotion production|presentation. FIG. 39(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable prize-winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 39(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the promotion effect is generated, the MPU 102 terminates the ready-to-win display as shown in FIG. 38(A).
Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the display continuation time has passed in step S506, the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped as shown in FIG. (Timing T1).
Further, the MPU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

After finishing the ready-to-win display, as shown in FIGS. 38(B) and 39(B), each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is enlarged and arranged at the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, By restarting the variable display of the pattern display device 47, promotion performance is executed. Also, MPU1
02 is the line of an angel present at the bottom of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, "Re-lottery!!
is displayed, the player is informed that the promotion effect has been generated. The duration of this promotion effect is the duration of the promotion effect set in the process of setting the promotion effect in step S1605, that is, the time from timing T1 to timing T5.
Further, when executing a promotion effect, the MPU 102 displays the display screen G of the symbol display device 47.
By displaying the devil's line "You can skip with right-handed hitting" present in the upper right of the game, it is suggested to the player that he can skip the promotion performance by hitting right-handedly.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39(C), the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" in step S812 without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, as shown in FIG. 39(D), the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813 is executed (timing T3).

Here, after the promotion effect occurs, if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50, after the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307 is completed, that is, after the promotion effect , the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813.
In this embodiment, the standby time for the round game is set to 100 seconds, so if the duration of the promotion effect is set to 90 seconds, the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 after 10 seconds have elapsed after the promotion effect is finished. will be executed.

In addition, the MPU 62 performs step S813 for opening and closing the big winning opening and closing process.
When executing the big winning opening opening process of 904 for the first time, an opening command is set in step S1002. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

When the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, the MPU 92 converts this information to a combination of symbols having the same odd number. When the information is replaced with such information, the effect C is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 38(C),
As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same odd number is stopped and displayed on the effective line L of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the words of the angel existing below the display screen G are displayed.
You did it! is displayed to inform the player of the success of the promotion effect.
After that, the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect C) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (Fig. 36 (C
)reference). At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number at the lower left of the display screen G as a stop result.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, the MPU 92 transfers this information to symbols having the same odd number. If the information related to the combination is not replaced, the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 38(D), the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same even number on the effective line L of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as a stop result, and the display screen The player is notified of the failure of the promotion presentation by displaying the angel's line "Unfortunate" existing below G.例文帳に追加
After that, the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect D) on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (Fig. 36 (D
)reference). At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number at the lower left of the display screen G as a stop result.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 is a low-probability result (disadvantageous Side internal lottery result) and the transition to a game state that is more advantageous for the player than the disadvantageous game state that is shifted with a low probability result, and a re-advantageous result (advantageous side internal lottery results).
In addition, the production pattern determination processing is promoted to release the camouflage as an expected production that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and to notify the player of the re-advantageous result. It functions as a promotion effect executing section that executes the effect on the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁
In addition, in this embodiment, the promotion effect is used as the expected effect, but other expected effect such as an effect of notifying the number of round games may be used. In short, the expected performance should be a performance that makes the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as (9) and (10) in the first embodiment, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 release the camouflage as an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and announces that the result is again advantageous. Since there is provided the effect pattern determination process for executing the promotion effect to be notified to the player by the symbol display device 47, the player can keep the game state by the main controller 60 until the game in the opening/closing execution mode is started. Even after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the promotion performance can be seen and the game can be played while enjoying.
(2) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 release the camouflage as an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and indicates that the result is again advantageous. Since the processing for determining the performance pattern for executing the promotion performance to be notified to the player by the pattern display device 47 is provided, the player can perform the promotion performance by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加It can be terminated and the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and allows the player to comfortably play the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may include a specific ball entry setting unit that sets the variable winning thru gate 50 to be valid or invalid. setting the variable winning thru gate 50 to valid in the winning ball setting unit;
And, it may be constructed such that the promotion effect is terminated with the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

According to this, the effect determination process includes validating the variable prize-winning through gate 50 in the specific ball entry setting unit, and ending the promotion effect with the ball entering the variable prize-winning through gate 50 as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the promotion effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Also, in this case, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 cause the game state to shift to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the variable winning through gate 50 is opened by the specific ball entry setting section. may be provided with an invalid period setting unit for setting an invalid period for invalidating the
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the invalid period setting unit determines the result of the internal lottery advantageous to the player (for example, the re-advantageous result), the invalid period may be set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (for example, a low-probability result) that is disadvantageous to the player.

According to this, if the result of the internal lottery is advantageous for the player, the invalid period setting unit
Since the invalid period is set longer than the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, the later the timing of ending the promotion presentation, the higher the player's expectation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 40 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the variable winning through gate 50 provided on the right side of the central portion.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 has, as shown in FIG. 40, a variable winning through gate 50 and a round number reporting through gate 51 provided on the left side of the central portion. is different from the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has, in the low probability mode, a left-handed route (first route) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, and the upper working port 3
6 and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 than the left-handed route. are arranged.

The round number notification through gate 51 includes a detection sensor 40h (see FIG. 41) for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the number-of-rounds notification through gate 51, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 41, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply.
The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data.
It is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. This ROM 63 includes a success/failure table storage area 63a and a distribution table storage area 63a.
3b and various areas such as reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 includes various counter areas 64
a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electrical holding area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40h. The output ports of the MPU 62 are the power failure monitoring board 65 and the payout control device 70
, and the sound emission control device 90 . In addition, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, and a variable winning device 38.
It is connected to the variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the open/close door 38b, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46.

The detection sensors 40a to 40h are for the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, various winning ports of the variable winning device 38, the out port 39, the variable winning through gate 50, and the number of rounds. The through gates 51 and the through gates 41 are provided in one-to-one correspondence. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40h, the MPU 62 selects various winning ports,
Winning determination (ball entry determination) to the out port 39, the variable winning through gate 50, the round number reporting through gate 51, and each through gate 41 is performed. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 42, the values of random numbers related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type are stored in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 41) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 42(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 42(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 42(a), includes "low-probability results (special distribution results for low-probability)", "small-round high-probability results (high-probability results for few-rounds)", And a plurality of distribution results of "most favorable result at low probability (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are assigned as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0
~ 9" is assigned to "low probability result", "10 to 19" is assigned to "few round high probability result", and "20 to 29" is assigned to "most advantageous result at low probability".

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 42(b), includes "low-probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "fourth-round best-advantage result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)". , "8th round most advantageous result (high probability special distribution result)", and "16 round most advantageous result (high probability special distribution result)". Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9""low probability result"
``10-19'' are assigned to ``4th round best result'', ``20-24'' are assigned to ``8th round best result'', and ``25-29'' are assigned to ``16th round best result''. ing.

In the following explanation, "Most favorable result at low probability", "Most favorable result for 4 rounds", "Most favorable result for 8 rounds", and "Most favorable result for 16 rounds" are also expressed simply as "Most favorable result". do. In addition, "4th round most favorable result", "8th round most favorable result", and "16th round most favorable result" are particularly expressed as "round distribution most favorable result".

Each sorting result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
The "few-round high-probability result" and "most advantageous result" are sorting results in which the win-fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "few-round high-probability result" and the "best result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100
A process different from the embodiment is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, game state transition processing,
The special prize opening opening process and effect determination process are different from those of the first embodiment. the following,
The contents of the game state transition process, the big winning opening opening process, and the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the through winning process of step S104, the MPU 62
When it is determined that the detection sensor 40h corresponding to the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds has detected the winning of the game ball, the number of rounds informing execution flag is set in the RAM64. This round number notification execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the round number notification through gate 51 .

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 performs step S80 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment.
1 to S816 are executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 62, as shown in FIG.
If it is determined in step S806 that the distribution result is not a high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, if it is determined that the distribution result is a "low probability result" or a "best result", step S81
This differs from the first embodiment in that the processes after 7C are executed, and the process of step S811C is executed instead of the process of step S811.

In step S817C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a "round distribution most advantageous result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "round distribution most favorable result", in step S818C, the MPU 62 executes a round number setting process.
In this round number setting process, the MPU 62 stores various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
A value corresponding to the number of rounds of the "most advantageous result" is set in the round counter RC provided in .

Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "fourth round most advantageous result", the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "4". set. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "8th round most advantageous result", it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "8". moreover,
When the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the result of allocation is the "most favorable result in 16 rounds", the MPU 62 sets "16" in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is not the "round distribution most favorable result", that is, the distribution result is a "low probability result" or a "low probability most favorable result". If so, the round counter RC is set to "15" in step S808.

Step S805, Step S807, Step S818C, and Step S808
After executing any one of the processes, the MPU 62 performs step S as in the first embodiment.
The processing after 809 is executed.

In step S811C, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag and the round number notification execution flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. In other words, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag and the round number notification execution flag set in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.
Also, in step S811C, the MPU 62 sets an opening execution flag in the RAM 64. FIG. This opening execution flag is a flag for specifying that the opening/closing execution mode has been entered and the round game can be started with the entry of the ball into the variable prize-winning through gate 50 as a trigger.
After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.

<Grand Prize Opening Processing>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the special winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 performs step S10 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment.
01 to S1010 are executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, after executing step S1003, or when it is determined in step S1001 that the opening execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 performs the process of step S1004. is different from the first embodiment in that the processes after step S1011C are executed before execution of .

In step S1011C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the round number notification execution flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1011C that the round number notification execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes the processing from step S1004.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the round number notification execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1011C, it sets the round number notification command in step S1012C. This number-of-rounds notification command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 performs normal processing in step S
At 301, the round number notification command set at step S1012C is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. In other words, the MPU 62 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, starts a round game when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, and then counts the number of rounds when a ball enters the round number reporting through gate 51. Set the notification command.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the number-of-rounds notification command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

After executing step S1012C, or when it is determined in step S1011C that the round number notification execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, step S1004
Execute the following processes.

<Production decision processing>
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1315 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the MPU 62 executes steps S1303C and S1313C instead of steps S1303 and S1313, executes the processing of step S1314, and then executes the processing of step S1315. before step S1316C-S13
This differs from the first embodiment in that the process of 19C is executed.

In step S1303C, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low-probability most advantageous result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same is determined, and if it is determined that the game result is a "low-probability result", the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L is determined, and if the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result for round distribution", the same stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L will be the same. Information is determined for symbol combinations with odd numbers. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In step S1313C, the MPU 92 executes processing for determining the opening/closing execution mode effect corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1312. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when determining that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312. Also, the MPU
92 selects an effect B as an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when it is determined that the game result is a "few rounds high probability result". Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result at low probability", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “most advantageous result of round allocation”, the MPU 92 selects the effect E as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. In addition, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode. As for the duration of the effect E, when it is determined in step S1312 that the game result is "four rounds with the most advantageous result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed four times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode. in step S13
12, when it is determined that the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds", it corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 8 times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode, and step S1312. If the game result is determined to be "16 rounds with the most advantageous result",
In the open/close execution mode, it corresponds to the time when the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 16 times in a long time mode.

In addition, the MPU 92, based on the selection result of the effects A to E, the above-mentioned step S12
03, the light emission control of the display lamp section 23 is executed, and the sound control of the speaker section 24 is executed.

In step S1314, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S1313. And MPU9
2 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94; This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 4
7 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S1314, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S1316C onward.

In step S1316C, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a round number notification command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1316C that the round number notification command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1315.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1316C that the round number notification command has been received, in step S1317C, the MPU 92 determines the type of game result based on the contents of the round number notification command.

In step S1318C, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for informing the number of rounds corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1317C. In the process of determining the number-of-rounds notification effect, the MPU 92 selects the 4-rounds notification effect as the effect for notifying the number of rounds when it is determined that the game result is the "fourth-round most advantageous result" in step S1317C. . Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "8th round most advantageous result", it selects the 8th round notification effect as the effect for informing the number of rounds. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "16th round most advantageous result", it selects the 16th round notification effect as the effect for informing the number of rounds.

In addition, the MPU 92, based on the selection result of the 4th round notification effect, the 8th round notification effect, or the 16th round notification effect, in the effect execution processing of step S1203 described above,
Light emission control of the display lamp section 23 is executed, and voice control of the speaker section 24 is executed.

In step S1319C, the MPU 92 sets a command for informing the number of rounds including information related to the effect for informing the number of rounds selected in step S1318C. and MP
The U92 stores the command for notifying the number of rounds in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM94. This command for notifying the number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the round number notification effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the round number notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 4
7 executes an effect for notifying the number of rounds selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S1319C, or after step S1316
If it is determined in C that the round number notification command has not been received, step S131
5 and subsequent steps are executed.
In step S1315, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG.
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the “normal result” and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 46, the pachinko machine 10 displays "
Winning jackpot" and "special missing result" results, and distribution results of "small round high probability result", "most favorable result at low probability", "low probability result", and "round distribution most favorable result" and

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 46, the "special losing result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the lottery (symbol x in the drawing). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift. In addition, in the "special failure result", the stop result is a combination of ready-to-win display symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. In addition, the support mode does not shift in the "special outlier result".

In the "few round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of times being two, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. . In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "few-round high-probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, "small round high accuracy result"
Then, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode.
Therefore, the player can grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "few rounds high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result at low probability" and "low probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is continued for a long time. manner is executed 15 times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result at low probability", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, opening and closing The effect for the run mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If so, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode effect is
It becomes the production D. In addition, the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode for "Most Favorable Result at Low Probability" and "Low Probability Result".

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the open/close execution mode is effect C, the game result is "most advantageous result at low probability". It can be understood that However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, so that the game result is "maximum when low probability". It is not possible to grasp whether it is a "favorable result" or a "low probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, if the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 47 displays an image indicating that the high probability mode is on the display screen G.
do not display in

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display an image indicating that the high probability mode is on the display screen G, and in the high frequency support mode, the game round is the end reference number of times (specifically,
100 times) is reached, an image is displayed on the display screen G to notify that the mode will be shifted to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result at low probability", the symbol display device 47 will make the final effect for the opening/closing execution mode in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. If the effect is D, the game result is camouflaged as if it were a "low-probability result".

Then, when the sorting result is "most advantageous result at low probability", the pattern display device 47 does not become "big hit winning" in the winning lottery, and has a high probability after 100 game rounds are completed. An image indicating the mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

In the "round distribution most advantageous result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 4 times, 8 times, or 16 times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is long. It is run 4, 8, or 16 times in time fashion. Specifically, in the "four rounds most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with four times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed for a long period of time. It is executed 4 times.
In addition, in the "eight rounds most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with eight times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning port 38a is executed eight times in a long time mode. be done. And, in the "16 Rounds Most Advantageous Result", the opening and closing execution mode is 16
Shift to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the number of times as the upper limit number of times, and the big winning mouth 3
The opening and closing of 8a is performed 16 times in a long time manner.

Here, in the "round distribution most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the success or failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the opening and closing execution mode effect is , production E.
Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the open/close execution mode is effect E, the game result is the "most advantageous result of round distribution". It can be understood that

<Flow of open/close execution mode>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the through gate for informing the number of rounds during execution of the opening/closing execution mode effect. Specifically, FIG. 47 (
A) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an effect E for the opening/closing execution mode is generated. Fig. 47(B)
is a diagram showing a display screen G when the game result is not "most advantageous result in 4 rounds".
FIG. 47(C) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is "best result in 4 rounds". FIG. 47(D) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is "most advantageous result in 16 rounds". FIG. 47(E) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is "best result in 8 rounds".

The MPU 92 selects the effect E as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode when it is determined that the game result is the "round allocation most advantageous result" in the process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S1313C. Then, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect E for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47A, the MPU 102 displays the characters "ROUND" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and displays the number "1" indicating the number of rounds on the right side. do. This number "1" informs the player that the first round game is being played. Also, for the number of rounds, 1 is added to the previous value each time the big winning opening opening process of step S904 is executed. The maximum value of the number of rounds is "4" when the game result is "most favorable result in 4 rounds", "8" when the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds", and "8" when the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds". It is "16" in the case of "16 round most advantageous result".

In addition, the MPU 102 displays the line of the devil existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, "You will know the number of rounds when you pass through the gate on the left side of the screen." It is suggested to the player that the number of rounds should be notified with the entry of the ball as a trigger.

When the game result is not the "most favorable result in 4 rounds" (when the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds" or "most favorable result in 16 rounds"), as shown in FIG. , repeat the execution of the big winning opening opening process of step S904, and display the angel's line "Still more!!" existing in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 at the start of execution of the fifth round game. , the player is notified that the game result was not the "fourth round most advantageous result".
On the other hand, if the game result is "most advantageous result in 4 rounds", FIG. 47(C)
As shown in , the execution of the big winning opening opening process of step S904 is repeated, and when the execution of the fourth round game ends, the angel's line "See you later!" is displayed, the player is notified that the game result is "most favorable result in 4 rounds".

After that, when the game result is "Most advantageous result of 16 rounds", as shown in FIG. At this time, the player is informed that the game result was "best result in 16 rounds" by displaying the angel's words "You did it!" present in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47.例文帳に追加.
On the other hand, if the game result is "best result in 8 rounds", FIG. 47(E)
As shown in , the execution of the big winning opening opening process of step S904 is repeated, and when the execution of the eighth round game ends, the angel's line "See you later!" is displayed, the player is informed that the game result is "8th round most advantageous result".

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the through gate for informing the number of rounds during execution of the effect for the open/close execution mode. Specifically, FIG. 48A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the effect E for the opening/closing execution mode is generated. FIG. 48B is a diagram showing the display screen G when a ball enters the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds.
FIG. 47(C) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is "best result in 8 rounds".

The MPU 92 selects the effect E as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode when it is determined that the game result is the "round allocation most advantageous result" in the process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S1313C. Then, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect E for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47A, the MPU 102 displays the characters "ROUND" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and displays the number "1" indicating the number of rounds on the right side. do. This number "1" informs the player that the first round game is being played. Also, for the number of rounds, 1 is added to the previous value each time the big winning opening opening process of step S904 is executed. The maximum value of the number of rounds is "4" when the game result is "most favorable result in 4 rounds", "8" when the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds", and "8" when the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds". It is "16" in the case of "16 round most advantageous result".

In addition, the MPU 102 displays the line of the devil existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, "You will know the number of rounds when you pass through the gate on the left side of the screen." It suggests to the player that the number of rounds should be notified when the ball is entered.

When a ball enters the round number notification through gate 51 during execution of the round game, the MPU 62 sets the round number notification command in step S1012C, and in step S301 of the normal process, in step S1012C. The set number of rounds notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1316C that the round number notification command has been received, in step S1318C, determination processing of the round number notification effect corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1317C is performed. to run. In the process of determining the effect for informing the number of rounds, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is "4" in step S1317C.
When it is determined that it is the most advantageous result in the round, the 4th round notification effect is selected as the effect for informing the number of rounds. Also, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is "
When it is determined that the result is "8th round most advantageous result", the 8th round notification effect is selected as the effect for informing the number of rounds. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "16th round most advantageous result", it selects the 16th round notification effect as the effect for informing the number of rounds.
In the following, a case where the game result is "most advantageous result of 16 rounds" (a case where the 16 round notification effect is selected as the effect for informing the number of rounds) will be described as an example.

When a ball enters the round number notification through gate 51 during execution of the round game, the MPU 102 executes the round number notification effect selected in the round number notification effect determination process of step S1318C. do. Specifically, 1 as a production for informing the number of rounds
When the 6-round notification effect is selected, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 48(B),
The player is notified that the game result is "16th round most advantageous result" by displaying the devil's line "16R fixed!!" present on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47.例文帳に追加
In addition, when the 4th round notification effect is selected as the effect for the number of rounds notification, the MPU
102 displays the devil's line "4R confirmed" existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and when the 8th round notification effect is selected as the effect for the notification of the number of rounds, M
The PU 102 reads the devil's line "8R
Confirm! ” is displayed.

After that, when the game result is "Most advantageous result in 16 rounds", as shown in FIG. At this time, the player is notified that the game is the last round by displaying the angel's line "See you later!" in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number-of-rounds notification through gate 51 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 notify the player. It functions as a notification entry means for notifying useful information for.
In addition, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the main controller 60, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. It functions as a payout information reporting unit.

Here, the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 is performed by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable prize winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times, thereby obtaining a predetermined number of game balls. A first internal lottery result (for example,
The game state is changed to an open/close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. There is a second internal draw outcome (e.g., 8 round best outcome and 16 round best outcome) that, upon transition, awards the player a higher value than the first internal draw outcome.

In the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60, the number of times of opening/closing of the variable winning device 38 is notified to the player when the ball enters the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. By notifying, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of game balls.

According to this embodiment, the same actions and effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the game ball enters the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. Since it is equipped with effect determination processing for notifying the player of information on payout,
The player can check the information regarding the payout of the game ball by letting the game ball enter the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(2) In the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60,
By informing the player of the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed with the entry of the ball into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds, the player is notified of the information on the payout of the game ball, so that the player can count the number of rounds. By letting a game ball enter the informing through gate 51, the number of opening and closing times of the variable winning device 38 can be confirmed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(3) Since the through-gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route, the player can follow the same path as when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. A game ball can enter the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route, but may be arranged on the right-handed route.
However, in this embodiment, since the variable winning device 38 is arranged in the right-handed route, when the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is arranged in the right-handed route, the variable winning device 38 When the game ball is entered, the game ball is also entered into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds, and entry into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is avoided during the execution of the performance for the open/close execution mode. be unable to do so. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable that the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may include a notification ball setting unit that enables or disables the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. By setting the number-of-rounds notification thru-gate 51 to valid in the notification-entering ball setting unit, and when the ball enters the number-of-rounds notification through gate 51, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball. may be configured.

According to this, the effect determination process is performed by the through gate 5 for informing the number of rounds in the informing ball setting section.
1 is set to be effective, and the entry of the ball into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds can be used as a trigger to inform the player of the information on the payout of the game ball. The timing of notification can be diversified. therefore,
The pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the players to the game.

Further, in this case, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 cause the main control device 60 to shift the game state to the open/close execution mode, and then the through gate for informing the number of rounds in the informing ball setting section. An invalid period setting part for setting an invalid period for setting 51 to invalid may be provided, and the invalid period setting part shifts the game state to an open/close execution mode capable of putting out more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls. In the case of a second internal lottery result giving the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result, the game state is shifted to an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out. The invalid period may be set longer than in the case of the internal lottery result.

According to this, the invalid period setting section shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, thereby giving the player a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery. In the case of the second internal lottery result given to , the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. The later the timing of informing the player of the information on the payout of the game balls, the higher the player's sense of expectation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game ball. It functioned only as a notification entry means to notify the information. On the other hand, the round number notification through gate 51 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and starts the game (round game) in the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) when the game ball enters. You may make it function as a specific ball entry means.

According to such a configuration, the player moves the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main controller 60 until the ready-to-win display is finished by entering the game ball into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. The ready-to-win display can be seen even after the game is played, and the game can be played while enjoying the game. In addition, the player can check the information regarding the payout of the game ball by letting the game ball enter the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds.

In other words, when the player terminates the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the variable prize-winning through gate 50, the player enters the opening/closing execution mode without confirming the information regarding the payout of the game ball. You can enjoy playing games. Further, when the player terminates the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds,
Information on the payout of game balls can be confirmed, and the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to check the information regarding the payout of the game balls when starting the game in the open/close execution mode, and allows the player to play the game comfortably. .

[Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100
performs processing different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, timer interrupt processing, game state transition processing, and effect determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. Contents of timer interrupt processing, game state transition processing, and effect determination processing according to the present embodiment will be described below.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 performs steps S101D to S as shown in FIG.
105 is executed periodically (for example, at 2 msec intervals).

In step S101D, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 uses the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40
The state of g is read, the state is determined, and stored in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. M.
When it is determined that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of the game balls, the PU62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Further, in step S101D, the MPU 62 detects the detection sensor 4 corresponding to the outlet 39.
When it is determined that 0e has detected the winning of the game ball, it sets an out entrance ball flag in the RAM64. This out-port entry flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the out-port 39 .
After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S102, as in the first embodiment.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 performs steps S801 to S8 as shown in FIG.
20D.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S812D.

The processing (processing after step S802) when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress is the same as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, the processing (processing after step S812D) when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is in progress is different from that of the first embodiment. Processing after step S812D will be described below.

In step S812D, MPU62 determines whether the round game execution flag is set to RAM64.
MPU62 performs the process after step S817D, when it determines with the round game execution flag not being set to RAM64 in step S812D.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812D, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, step S
The processing after 813 is executed.

In step S817D, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S817D that the value of the timer counter WT is not equal to or less than "0", in step S818D the out-going ball flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared. In other words, before the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game elapses, the out-entry ball flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S101D is cleared each time the game state transition processing is executed. Become.
In response to this, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter WT to "0" in step S817D.
', a gate addition command is set in step S819D. The MPU 62 transmits the gate addition command set in step S819D to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the gate extension command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

In step S820D, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM 64 has an out-going ball flag set.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S820D that the flag for entering a ball is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S813 onward, as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S820D that the out-port entry flag is not set in the RAM 64, it ends the game state transition processing.

Thus, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 performs step S820D of the game state transition process.
If it is determined that the flag for entering the out-hole is set in the RAM 64 in step S813, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. In other words, in the game state transition process, after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the MPU 62, when the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game has passed, the entry to the out port 39 is prohibited. It functions as a specific control starting section that starts a game in the opening/closing execution mode as a trigger.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the out port 39 allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and functions as another ball entry means different from the variable winning through gate 50 (specific ball entry means).

In the present embodiment, the game state transition process is triggered by entering a ball into the out port 39 after a predetermined time (waiting time for round game) has passed after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the MPU 62. However, the game in the opening/closing execution mode may be started with the entry of a ball into the out port 39 before a predetermined time elapses.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the other ball entry means is only the out port 39, but for example,
The general prize winning opening 35, the upper working opening 36, the lower working opening 37, etc. may be used as other ball entry means. In other words, the gaming machine may have a plurality of other ball-entering means. In this case, the specific control starting unit may vary the predetermined time for each ball-entering means.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process is triggered by entering a ball into the out port 39 after a predetermined time (waiting time for a round game) has passed after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the MPU 62. However, for example, the game in the opening and closing execution mode may be started when the waiting time (specific time) for the round game has passed, and another ball entry means , and the elapse of a specific time may be used together. At this time, if all the ball entry means provided in the game area are replaced with other ball entry means, the gaming machine can start a game in a specific control state triggered by the shooting of the game ball into the game area. .

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1315 as shown in FIG.

In step S1301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1316D.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has been received, in step S1302, based on the content of the type command, the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result". result”.

The MPU 92, in step S1302, determines that the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result".
If it is determined as such, in step S1303, symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result is executed. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S1304, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not it is “Few Rounds High Probability Result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", in step S1305, it executes common symbol determination processing. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects different numbers that will not be selected in the case of a "normal failure result" in the winning lottery, instead of a combination of symbols having the same number or a combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display. Determine the special symbol combination (eg, "3, 4, 1") that you have.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is not the "few rounds high probability result", in step S1306, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for the losing result. In this outlier result symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display occurs when determining that the game result is a “special loss result”,
When it is determined that the game result is the "out of normal result", it is determined that the ready-to-win display does not occur.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S1303, S1305, and S1306, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S1307D. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. Note that step S1307D
Then, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

In addition, the MPU 92, based on the selected production pattern, the above-mentioned step S1203
In the effect execution processing of 1, light emission control of the display lamp section 23 is executed, and voice control of the speaker section 24 is executed.

In step S1308, the MPU 92 issues a change start command, steps S1303,
A stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in either step S1305 or step S1306 is set. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1308, or when it is determined in step S1301 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92
The processing after 1316D is executed.
In step S1316D, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a gate addition command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1316D that the gate extension command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1309.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1316D that the gate addition command has been received, in step S1317D the MPU 92 sets the gate addition notification command. Then, the MPU 92 stores the gate addition notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This gate addition notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 the data table for executing the effect for the notification of the addition of gates on the pattern display device 47 based on the addition of gates notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47
notifies the player that the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game has passed and that the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started with the entry of the ball into the out port 39 as a trigger.

After executing the process of step S1317D, or after step S1316
If it is determined at D that the gate addition command has not been received, the processing from step S1309 is executed.
In step S1309, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1315.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that an opening command has been received, in step S1310 it determines whether the effect duration time selected in the effect pattern determination process in step S1307 has elapsed. determine whether or not

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1310 that the effect continuation time has not passed, in step S1311 the effect end process is executed. In this production end processing,
The MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307.
In step S1318D, the MPU 92 sets an effect end execution flag in the RAM 94. FIG. This effect end execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the effect continuation time elapses and the effect end process of step S1311 is executed.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1310 that the effect continuation time has elapsed, it clears the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94 in step S1319D.

After executing the process of step S1318D or step S1319D, the MPU 92 determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command in step S1312.

In step S1313D, the MPU 92 executes processing for determining the opening/closing execution mode effect corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1312. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when determining that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312. Also, the MPU
92 selects an effect B as an effect for the opening/closing execution mode when it is determined that the game result is a "few rounds high probability result". Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the effect CS or the effect DS is generated as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. Also, M
When the PU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the PU 92 selects the effect CL or the effect DL as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. do. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DS as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. . Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DL as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. .

The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. Further, the duration of the effects CS, CL and the effects DS, DL correspond to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode.
In the following description, the effect CS and the effect CL are also simply referred to as the effect C, and the effect DS and the effect DL are also simply referred to as the effect D.

Further, the MPU 92, based on the selection result of the effects A to D, the above-mentioned step S12
03, the light emission control of the display lamp section 23 is executed, and the sound control of the speaker section 24 is executed.

In step S1314, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S1313. And MPU9
2 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94; This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 4
7 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S1314, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1315 and subsequent steps.
In step S1315, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 performs step S1 of the effect determination process.
At 307D, a production pattern determination process is executed. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1408D as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display.
Specifically, the MPU 92, based on the content of the command for variation, determines if the game result is a "most advantageous result", a "low probability result", a "few rounds high probability result", or a "special unsuccessful result". It is determined to generate the ready-to-win display, and when the game result is "out of normal result", it is determined not to generate the ready-to-win display.

When the MPU 92 determines to generate the ready-to-win display in step S1401,
The process after step S1402 is executed.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines not to generate the ready-to-win display in step S1401, it executes the processing from step S1404.

First, the processing (processing after step S1402) when it is determined in step S1401 that the MPU 92 should generate the ready-to-win display will be described.
In step S1402, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the effect continuation time for ready-to-win generation. In this ready-to-win effect duration setting process, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 as the effect duration time. do. Specifically, MPU92
sets the effect continuation time by referring to the effect continuation time table for reach generation stored in the table storage area 93 a for reach of the ROM 93 . This ready-to-win effect duration table stores a plurality of ready-to-win indications and a plurality of effect duration times respectively corresponding to the plurality of ready-to-win indications in association with each other.
Here, the duration of the ready-to-win display is the total time of the display duration included in the variation command and the presentation duration.

In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter than the wait time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 as the presentation duration time. The same time as the time may be set as the presentation continuation time, or a longer time than the standby time for the round game may be set as the presentation continuation time. Moreover, the MPU 92 may set the effect duration time so that the ready-to-win display is continued without ending. In this case, the ready-to-win display is performed by, for example, slowing down the image, repeating the image, or stopping the image and making the player hit the push button repeatedly to extend the effect of the ready-to-win display. may be configured.

After executing step S1402, the MPU 92, in step S1405D,
It is determined whether or not an effect end execution flag is set in AM94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is set, in step S1406D, it executes normal ready-to-win display setting processing. In this normal reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the normal reach display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is not set, in step S1407D, it executes special ready-to-win display setting processing. In this special reach display setting process, the MPU 92 performs step S14
A special ready-to-win display corresponding to the performance duration set in 02 is selected and set.

After executing the process of step S1406D or the process of step S1407D, the MPU
92 terminates the effect pattern determination process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1404) when the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 not to generate the ready-to-win display will be described.
In step S1404, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the non-reach effect duration time. In the processing for setting the non-reach effect duration time, the MPU 92 sets the effect duration time to the same time as the display duration time included in the variation command.

In step S1408D, the MPU 92 clears the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94.
After executing the process of step S1408D, the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process.

<About the flow when the reach display occurs>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed.
Specifically, FIG. 53A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. Figure 5
3(B) is a view showing the display screen G when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 53(C) is a view showing the display screen G after a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 53(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G in a state in which an effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.
Note that FIG. 53 shows the display screen G when the game result is the "best result", and the same applies when the game result is the "low probability result".

FIG. 54A is a timing chart showing the state of the variable display on the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 54(B) is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the pattern display device 47 (during variable display or stopped). Figure 5
4 (C) is the state of the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball).
is a timing chart showing FIG. 54(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 53(A), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed" on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, so that you can hit right-handed. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 54A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the performance continuation time, as shown in FIG. 54B, the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812D, as shown in FIG.

In addition, the MPU 62 performs step S813 for opening and closing the big winning opening and closing process.
When executing the big winning opening opening process of 904 for the first time, an opening command is set in step S1002. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

Here, when it is determined that the opening command is received in step S1309 before the production duration time elapses after occurrence of the ready-to-win display, the MPU 92 performs step S13.
At 11, a performance end process is executed. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307D. In other words,
The MPU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 54(B).
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the ready-to-win display before the effect continuation time elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." It is suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by pressing, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Here, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize them. Therefore, when the ready-to-win display occurs, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the big win has been won. By daringly confirming the display section 45, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player as to whether or not it is confirmed whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the reach display by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" which is present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Although it is suggested to the player that it can be done, other methods may be used to suggest to the player that the player can hit right and skip the ready-to-win display. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements a light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning thru gate 50, and by causing the light emitting means to emit light, it is possible to skip the ready-to-win display by striking to the right. You may suggest to the player.

Here, if a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the effect continuation time elapses, that is, if the ready-to-win display is ended (skipped), the effect end execution flag is stored in the RAM 94 in step S1318D. is set, it means that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM94.
Therefore, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" in step S1312 and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the effect for opening/closing execution mode in step S1313D is determined. In the determination process, the effect CS or the effect DS is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DS as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. .

Then, when the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and displays the angels as shown in FIG. 53(B). By making the player win, the ready-to-win display is terminated and the player is informed that the game result is the ``best result'' or ``low probability result''.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the MPU 102 generates an opening/closing execution mode effect (effect CS or effect DS) based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.
is executed by the symbol display device 47.
Specifically, in the effect CS or effect DS for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102
As shown in 3(D), the angel existing in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 is made to fly.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game elapses. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the flow when a ball does not enter the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed.
Specifically, FIG. 55A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. Figure 5
5 (B) and (C), the through gate 50 for variable winning before the waiting time for the round game elapses
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G when no ball is entered into the . FIG. 55(D) is a view showing the display screen G after a ball has entered the out port 39 or the variable winning through gate 50 after the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 55(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G in a state where the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.
Note that FIG. 55 shows the display screen G when the game result is the "best result", and the same applies when the game result is the "low probability result".

FIG. 56A is a timing chart showing the state of the variable display on the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 56(B) is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the pattern display device 47 (during variable display or stopped). Figure 5
6 (C) is the state of the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball).
is a timing chart showing FIG. 56(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 55(A), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed" on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, so that you can hit right-handed. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 56A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. 55(B) and FIG. 56(B), the pattern display device 47 continues to operate until the duration of the effect continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped. The variable display continues (timing T13).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" in step S817D without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, that is, when the waiting time for the round game has passed (timing T3), a gate extension command is set in step S819D. MPU92
is determined to have received the gate addition command in step S1316D,
In step S1317D, a gate addition notification command is set. The MPU 102 is
Based on the gate expansion notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the devil's words "hit the ball" appearing at the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, as shown in FIG. 55(C).
is displayed, the player is notified that the game in the open/close execution mode can be started with the entry of the ball into the out port 39 as a trigger.

Here, since the out port 39 allows most of the game balls hit into the game area to enter, the player rotates the shooting handle 27 to hit the game ball into the game area, thereby making the game ball out. A game in the open/close execution mode can be started by entering a ball into the mouth 39. - 特許庁

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T6). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812D, as shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the MPU 62, when the ball enters the out port 39, performs step S101D.
In the reading process of , an out-entry ball flag is set in the RAM 64 . And MPU62
, when it is determined in step S820D that the out-port ball row flag is set in the RAM 64, the big winning hole opening/closing process of step S813 is executed.

In addition, the MPU 62 performs step S813 for opening and closing the big winning opening and closing process.
When the big winning opening opening process of 904 is executed for the first time, an opening command is set in step S1002. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

Here, when the ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50 (when the ball enters the out port 39) after the performance duration time has elapsed, the ready-to-win display is not ended (skipped). In this case, since the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared in step S1319D, the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94.
Therefore, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" in step S1312 and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the effect is generated for the open/close execution mode. Select CL or effect DL. Also, M
When the PU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the PU 92 selects the effect DL as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and displays the angels as shown in FIG. 55(C). By making the player win, the ready-to-win display is terminated and the player is informed that the game result is the ``best result'' or ``low probability result''.
After that, as shown in FIG. 55(D), the MPU 102 generates an effect for the opening/closing execution mode (effect CL or effect DL) based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92.
is executed by the symbol display device 47 .
Specifically, in the effect CL or the effect DL for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102
As shown in 5(E), a reproduced image when the angel wins the battle between the angel and the devil is enlarged and displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. FIG.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is based on the effect viewing period from when the ready-to-win display is executed on the symbol display device 47 until the end of the ready-to-win display. It functions as an effect change unit that changes the effect for the run mode.
Specifically, in the effect determination process, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode (effect during a game in a specific control state) directed to the player whose effect viewing period is short is set as the effect CS or effect DS, and the effect viewing period is long. The effect CL or effect DL for the opening/closing execution mode directed to the player (the effect during the game in the specific control state).

In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has passed, this is regarded as a short effect viewing time (short-term effect viewing time), and the waiting time for the round game is A long performance viewing time (long-term performance viewing time) is defined as a case where a ball does not enter the variable prize-winning through gate 50 before the elapse of, and the performance determination process is based on this performance viewing period, the game state transition processing. The production for the opening and closing execution mode that starts with was changed.
On the other hand, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses, the time until the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 is measured. Based on the effect viewing time, the effect determining process may change the effect for the opening/closing execution mode started in the game state transition process.
In short, the effect change unit changes the effect during the game in the specific control state started by the specific control start unit based on the effect viewing period from when the expected effect is executed by the variable display means until the expected effect is finished. Change it.

FIG. 57 shows the ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game round when a ball enters the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed and the game result is a "special loss result". 4 is a diagram showing a display screen G; FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 57A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. Figure 5
7(B) is a view showing the display screen G when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses and the game result is a "special loss result". be. Figure 5
7(C) is a view showing the display screen G after a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 57(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game cycle.

The flow of ready-to-win display that occurs in the next round of the game when the game result is the "special loss result" will be described below with reference to FIGS. 54 and 57 described above.
When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 57(A), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has passed, as shown in FIG.
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the performance continuation time, as shown in FIG. 54(B), the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812D, as shown in FIG.

In addition, the MPU 62 performs step S813 for opening and closing the big winning opening and closing process.
When executing the big winning opening opening process of 904 for the first time, an opening command is set in step S1002. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

Here, when it is determined that the opening command is received in step S1309 before the performance duration time elapses after occurrence of the ready-to-win display, the MPU 92 performs step S13.
At 11, a performance ending process is executed. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307D. In other words,
As shown in FIG. 54(B), the MPU 92 terminates the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 .
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the ready-to-win display before the effect continuation time elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." It is suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by pressing, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Here, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to the columns Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize them. Therefore, when the ready-to-win display occurs, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the big win has been won. By daringly confirming the display section 45, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player as to whether or not it is confirmed whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the reach display by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Although it is suggested to the player that it can be done, other methods may be used to suggest to the player that the player can hit right and skip the reach indication. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning thru gate 50, and by causing the light emitting means to emit light, it is possible to skip the ready-to-win display by striking to the right. You may suggest to the player.

Here, if a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the effect continuation time elapses, that is, if the ready-to-win display is ended (skipped), the effect end execution flag is stored in the RAM 94 in step S1318D. is set, it means that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM94.
Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

57 (B
), by stopping the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and making the devil win, the ready-to-win display is ended and the player is notified that the game result is a "special loss result".
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the MPU 102 displays the effect (effect A) for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 4 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92.
7.

Also, the MPU 92 closes the variable winning through gate 5 before the waiting time for the round game elapses.
When it is determined in step S1401 that the ready-to-win display is to be generated in the next game round when the ball is entered into 0 and the game result is the "special loss result", in step S1405D, the RAM 94 stores It is determined whether or not a performance end execution flag is set.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is set, in step S1406D, the MPU 92 executes normal ready-to-win display setting processing. In this normal reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the normal reach display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1402.

The MPU 102 executes the normal ready-to-win display on the symbol display device 47 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 .
Specifically, when the normal ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , and the angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 is made to compete with a new character different from the devil existing on the left side. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.

FIG. 58 is a display of a ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game round when a ball enters the through gate for variable prize winning after the waiting time for the round game has passed and the game result is "special loss result". FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a screen G; FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 58A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. Figure 5
8 (B) and (C), the through gate 50 for variable winning before the waiting time for the round game elapses
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G when no ball is entered into the . FIG. 58(D) shows the display screen G when a ball enters the out port 39 or the variable winning through gate 50 after the waiting time for the round game has elapsed, and the game result is "special loss". It is a figure which shows. Figure 58
(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game round.

The flow of the ready-to-win display that occurs in the next round of the game when the game result is the "special loss result" will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 and 58 described above.
When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 58(A), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 56A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. 56(B) and FIG. 58(B), the pattern display device 47 is displayed until the effect duration time elapses even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped. The variable display continues (timing T13).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" in step S817D without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, that is, when the waiting time for the round game has passed (timing T3), a gate extension command is set in step S819D. MPU92
is determined to have received the gate addition command in step S1316D,
In step S1317D, a gate addition notification command is set. The MPU 102 is
Based on the gate expansion notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the devil's words "hit the ball" appearing at the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, as shown in FIG. 58(C).
is displayed, the player is notified that the game in the open/close execution mode can be started with the entry of the ball into the out port 39 as a trigger.

Here, since the out port 39 allows most of the game balls hit into the game area to enter, the player rotates the shooting handle 27 to hit the game ball into the game area, thereby making the game ball out. A game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering the ball into the mouth 39. - 特許庁

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T6). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812D, as shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the MPU 62, when the ball enters the out port 39, performs step S101D.
In the reading process of , an out-entry ball flag is set in the RAM 64 . And MPU62
, when it is determined in step S820D that the out-port ball row flag is set in the RAM 64, the big winning hole opening/closing process of step S813 is executed.

Further, after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813, the MPU 62
When executing the big winning opening opening process of 904 for the first time, an opening command is set in step S1002. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

Here, if a ball enters the variable winning thru gate 50 after the effect duration time has elapsed, that is, if the ready-to-win display is not ended (skipped), step S131.
Since the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared at 9D, the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94. - 特許庁
Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

58 (C
), by stopping the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and making the devil win, the ready-to-win display is ended and the player is notified that the game result is a "special loss result".
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(D), the MPU 102 displays the effect (effect A) for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 4 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92.
7.

In addition, the MPU 92, after the waiting time for the round game has passed, a ball enters the out port 39 or the variable winning through gate 50, and the game result is a "special loss result". If it is determined in step S1401 that the ready-to-win display is to be generated, it is determined in step S1405D whether or not the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94 .
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is not set, in step S1407D, the MPU 92 executes special ready-to-win display setting processing. In this special ready-to-win display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets a special ready-to-win display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1402.

The MPU 102 executes the special ready-to-win display on the symbol display device 47 based on the fluctuation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 .
Specifically, when generating the special ready-to-win display, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. After the angel has lost the previous battle between the angel and the devil, the angel stops the devil who is about to leave, and makes the angel and the devil fight again. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.

Thus, in the present embodiment, after the ready-to-win display is executed by the symbol display device 47, the effect determination process is executed next time by the symbol display device 47 based on the effect viewing period until the ready-to-win display is finished. It functions as a production change unit that changes the reach display of.
Specifically, in the effect determination process, the next ready-to-win display for the player whose viewing period for the effect is short is set to the normal ready-to-win display, and the next ready-to-win display for the player who has been watching the effect for a long time is the special ready-to-win display. and

In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has passed, this is regarded as a short effect viewing time (short-term effect viewing time), and the waiting time for the round game is A long effect viewing time (long-term effect viewing time) is defined as a case where a ball does not enter the variable prize-winning through gate 50 before the elapse of, and the effect determining process is performed based on the effect viewing period in the pattern display device 47. The next reach display to be executed in was changed.
On the other hand, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses, the time until the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 is measured. Then, the effect determining process may change the next ready-to-win display to be executed by the symbol display device 47 based on the effect viewing time.
In short, the performance changing part should change the next expected performance to be executed by the variable display means based on the performance viewing period until the expected performance is finished after the expected performance is executed by the variable display means.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is based on the effect viewing period from when the ready-to-win display is executed by the pattern display device 47 until the ready-to-win display is finished, and the content of the effect after the ready-to-win display is finished. It functions as a production change unit that changes the
In the present embodiment, the effect change unit changes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode and the next ready-to-win display to be executed by the pattern display device 47 as the content of the effect. You can change it.

According to this embodiment, (1) to (8) and (10) in the first embodiment
In addition to the same functions and effects as in the above, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 display the ready-to-win display on the pattern display device 4.
After the execution in 7, the effect viewing period is short because the effect determining process for changing the contents of the effect after finishing the ready-to-win display is provided based on the effect viewing period until ending the ready-to-win display. The performance directed to the player can be made different from the performance directed to the player who has spent a long performance viewing period, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

(2) The effect determination process changes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, which is started in the game state transition process, based on the effect viewing period. The performance can be made different from the performance for the opening/closing execution mode directed to the player who has spent a long performance viewing period, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.
(3) The effect determination process changes the next ready-to-win display to be executed by the symbol display device 47 based on the effect viewing period. It is possible to make it different from the next reach display for the player who has been watching for a long time,
It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

(4) In the game state transition processing, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 or exits from a different exit from the variable winning through gate 50. Since the game in the opening/closing execution mode is started when the ball enters the outlet 39, opening/closing is executed when the ball enters the out port 39 even if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加Mode play can be started.
(5) In the game state transition process, the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60, and after a predetermined time has passed, the game in the opening/closing execution mode is started with the ball entering the out port 39 as a trigger. Therefore, even if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started when the ball enters the out port 39.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect determination process is performed by shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 60, and then using the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger for the variable winning. It also functions as an opening/closing times notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening/closing times of the device 38 . Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by selecting effects A to D as effects for the opening/closing execution mode.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, the variable winning thru gate 50 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters the game, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 It functions as a notification entry means for notifying users of useful information. In the effect determination process, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball triggered by the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50. It functions as a payout information reporting unit.

According to this, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger. Since the player is provided with an effect determination process for informing the player of the information on the payout of the game ball, the player can confirm the information on the payout of the game ball by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state,
When a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses, or when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the open/close door 38b is closed again. had set. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may vary according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state,
When the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state,
When the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10
is equipped with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state when a game ball enters, and when a predetermined time elapses, the ball can be entered into this end trigger port. It may be configured as
(5) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state,
When a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration period) elapses, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing door 38b
is set to the open state, the open/close door 38b may be set to the closed state again when a predetermined time elapses from the time when a prize is won in the big winning opening 38a.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state,
The opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the game ball launch cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and less than or equal to n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open/close execution modes.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open/close execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and a round game with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode 4, 8, 15, 16 times. It had an opening and closing execution mode. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 differs in the mode of the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b, such as half-opening or full-opening. , a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 92, when the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the information related to the combination of special symbols as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L had decided. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine information related to the stop result.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result" and the "normal loss result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. A lottery for generating a big hit is executed by comparing the success/failure table and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU
62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute a lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to during the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the number of random numbers that become the "special loss result" is 28, and the occurrence of the big win. Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery of (1), the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of becoming a "special outlier result" may be set lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of a "special out-of-match result" may be set to 0 in the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, the player may create favorable and unfavorable playing states. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result display section. By storing in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the upper working port 36 and the reserved information regarding the lower working port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 has an upper operating port 36
You may store the holding|maintenance information which concerns on and the holding|maintenance information which concerns on the lower operation opening 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 37 for completing the game round regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game cycle by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 47 to operate.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable.
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 displays a symbol (
(Pattern) may be displayed on the display screen G to perform an effect for a game cycle.

For example, the pattern display device 47 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 47 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of the present invention, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of the present invention are as follows:
The invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose of the features of the invention group are included in the features of the invention group.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1.
Shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on the game board
), starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters, and said starting ball entering means A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the game ball. ,
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. and,
expected effect executing means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing an expected effect by the variable display means to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state;
A specific ball entry means (variable prize winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a specific control start section (game state transition processing ),
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, an expected performance end section (performance determination processing) is provided for ending the expected performance with the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means as a trigger. A game machine characterized by

According to feature A1 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect execution means causes the game state transition means to shift the game state to the specific control state, and then terminates the expected effect triggered by the ball entering the specific ball entry means. Since the expected performance ending part is provided, the player shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state shifting means until the expected performance is ended by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. The expected performance can be seen even after the game is finished, and the game can be enjoyed while enjoying the game. again,
The game state transition means includes a specific control start section for starting the game in the specific control state when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transfer means, and then triggered by the ball entering the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the expected performance, allowing the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A ready-to-win display execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) for executing a ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means executes the ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Since the display executing section is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to view the ready-to-win display, and allows the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A first internal lottery result (small win result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state;
a second internal lottery result (jackpot result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result;
The ready-to-reach display executing unit, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery , a gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the ready-to-reach display executing unit determines that the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. When it is the result, the ready-to-win display is executed by the variable display means, so that the player expects that the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in feature A3 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
said first internal lottery result for shifting the game state to said specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
The second internal lottery providing the player with a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. and a lottery result.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result can cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be put out than the game balls, a value higher than the result of the first internal lottery can be given to the player. By executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in feature A4 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control initiation unit
After setting the opening and closing ball-entering means to the open state until setting it to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game);
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the result of the first internal lottery shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the opening/closing count of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times. The result of the second internal lottery is a specific control that can put out more game balls than a predetermined number by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than a predetermined number of times. Since the game state can be shifted to the state, the ready-to-win display execution part makes the player further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the result of the first internal lottery for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time;
Said second method for setting one opening/closing time of said opening/closing ball-entering means to a time longer than said predetermined time
and an internal lottery result of the game machine.

According to feature A6 of the group of the present invention, the first internal lottery result is set to a predetermined time for one open/close ball entry means, and the second internal lottery result is one opening/closing ball entry means. is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, the game machine is capable of determining whether the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery. As compared with the case of , the game in the specific control state can be terminated immediately, and the next internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 or feature A6 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing means is notified to the player when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means. A game machine characterized by comprising (effect determination processing).

According to feature A7 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then, when a ball is entered into the specific ball entry means, the opening and closing ball entry means is activated. Since an opening/closing frequency reporting unit for informing the player of the opening/closing frequency is provided, the player can confirm the opening/closing frequency of the opening/closing ball entry means by entering a game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the game machine allows the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of openings and closings of the opening/closing ball-entering means, so that the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7 of the present invention group,
A game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and another ball entry means (out port 39) different from the specific ball entry means is provided,
The specific control start unit, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, starts the game in the specific control state triggered by the ball entering the other ball-entering means,
The expected effect ending unit terminates the expected effect when starting the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. machine.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then enters a ball into the specific ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means is Since a game in a specific control state is started when a ball is entered into another different ball entry means, even if a ball is not entered into the specific ball entry means, the ball is entered into the other ball entry means. can be used as a trigger to start a game in a specific control state.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in feature A8 of the invention group,
The specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time has passed, the specific control state is started with the ball entering the other ball entering means as a trigger. A gaming machine characterized by starting a game.

According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time elapses, a ball is entered into another ball entry means. Since the game in the specific control state is started as , even if the ball does not enter the specific ball entering means, the game in the specific control state can be started with the entry of the ball into another ball entering means as a trigger. can be done.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9 of the invention group,
The specific control start unit, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, starts the game in the specific control state when a specific time has elapsed,
The expected effect ending unit terminates the expected effect when starting the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. machine.

According to the feature A10 of the group of inventions, the specific control starting section shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means or the specific time elapses. , the game in the specific control state is started, so that the game in the specific control state can be started even if the ball is not entered into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the game machine can surely start the game in the specific control state after the game state transfer means shifts the game state to the specific control state, and the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expectation performance ending unit is characterized in that the specific ball entry setting unit effectively sets the specific ball entry means, and terminates the expectation performance in response to the ball entering the specific ball entry means. game machine.

According to feature A11 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect ending unit sets the specific ball entering means to valid in the specific ball entering setting part, and terminates the expected effect triggered by a ball entering the specific ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A12.
In the gaming machine described in feature A11 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting processing),
If the result of the internal lottery (jackpot result) that is advantageous to the player is based on the result of the internal lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the invalid period setting unit A game machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (small win result) that is disadvantageous to a player.

According to feature A12 of the group of the present inventions, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A13.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature A13 of the invention group, the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path,
The player can cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means by causing the game ball to enter the same path as the game ball entering the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A14.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature A14 of the invention group, the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path,
The player can cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means by causing the game ball to enter a path different from that for entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine
The player's intention can be surely reflected, and the player can play the game comfortably.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, the following problems can be solved because the player can play the game comfortably.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, in such a gaming machine, after starting the variable display of patterns, an expectation effect is executed so that the player expects that the game state will shift to a specific control state.

However, regardless of whether or not the player wins the jackpot lottery, the player has to watch the expected performance to the end, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1.
Shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on the game board
), and starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game ball (pachinko) machine 10),
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. and,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the game in the specific control state is started when a ball is entered into the specific ball entry means or when a specific time elapses. A gaming machine comprising a control start section (game state transition processing).

According to the feature B1 of the group of inventions, the specific control starting section shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means or the specific time elapses. Since the game in the specific control state is started with this as a trigger, the game in the specific control state can be started even if the ball is not entered into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the game machine can reliably start the game in the specific control state after the game state transfer means shifts the game state to the specific control state, and the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
Variable display means (symbol display device 47) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means;
Expected effect executing means (sound light emitting control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing expected effect by the variable display means to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, an expected performance ending section (performance determination processing) for ending the expected performance when starting the game in the specific control state.
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B2 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then, when starting the game in the specific control state, i.e., to the specific ball entry means. When a ball is entered or when a specific time elapses, the expected effect ending section is provided, so that the player can use the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started. Even after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by pressing, the expected performance can be seen, and the game can be enjoyed. Further, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the expected performance, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A ready-to-win display execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) is provided for executing a ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player. game machine.

According to feature B3 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect executing means executes the ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Since the display execution part is provided, the player can see the ready-to-win display even after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state shifting means until the game in the specific control state is started, and enjoyment. You can play while playing. Also, the player can end the ready-to-win display and start a game in a specific control state by entering a game ball into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to view the ready-to-win display, allowing the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A first internal lottery result (small win result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state;
a second internal lottery result (jackpot result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result;
The ready-to-reach display execution unit, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery , a gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the ready-to-reach display execution unit determines that the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. When the result is the result, the ready-to-win display is executed by the variable display means, so that the player is made to expect that the result of the internal lottery was the result of the second internal lottery by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B4 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
The second internal lottery that provides the player with a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. and a lottery result.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result can cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be put out than the game balls, a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery can be given to the player. By executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in feature B5 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control initiation unit
After setting the opening and closing ball-entering means to the open state until setting it to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game);
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, the result of the first internal lottery shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the opening/closing count of the open/close ball entry means to a predetermined number of times. The result of the second internal lottery is a specific control that can put out more game balls than a predetermined number by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. Since the game state can be shifted to the state, the ready-to-win display execution part makes the player further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in feature B6 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the result of the first internal lottery for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time;
Said second method for setting one opening/closing time of said opening/closing ball-entering means to a time longer than said predetermined time
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an internal lottery result of

According to feature B7 of the group of the present invention, the first internal lottery result is set to a predetermined time for one open/close ball entry means, and the second internal lottery result is one opening/closing ball entry means. is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, the game machine is capable of determining whether the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery. As compared with the case where the next internal lottery can be executed immediately, the variable display means can start variable display of a plurality of patterns. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B6 or Feature B7 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the number of times of opening and closing notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means triggered by the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means. A game machine characterized by comprising (effect determination processing).

According to feature B8 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then, when a ball enters the specific ball entry means, the opening and closing ball entry means is activated. Since an opening/closing frequency reporting unit for informing the player of the opening/closing frequency is provided, the player can confirm the opening/closing frequency of the opening/closing ball entry means by entering a game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of openings and closings of the opening/closing ball-entering means, so that the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A disadvantageous side internal lottery result that shifts to a game state disadvantageous to the player;
Transitioning to a game state more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state transitioned by the disadvantageous internal lottery result, and disguising the advantageous internal lottery result as if it were the disadvantageous game state;
The expected performance execution means is
As an expectation performance to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, the camouflage is canceled and the promotion performance to notify the player of the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side is displayed by the variable display. The game machine is characterized by comprising a promotion performance executing part executed by means.

According to feature B9 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect executing means cancels camouflage as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and the result is an advantageous side internal lottery result. Since the promotion effect execution part for notifying the player of the promotion effect is executed by the variable display means, the player is kept in the game state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started. to a specific control state, the promotion performance can be seen, and the game can be enjoyed. Also, the player can end the promotion effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. therefore,
The game machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion performance, and allows the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B9 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expected effect ending unit enables the specific ball entering means by the specific ball entering setting unit, and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specified ball entering means. game machine.

According to feature B10 of the group of the present inventions, the expected performance end unit sets the specific ball entry setting unit to enable the specific ball entry means, and terminates the expectation performance triggered by the entry into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine described in feature B10 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting processing),
If the result of the internal lottery (jackpot result) that is advantageous to the player is based on the result of the internal lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the invalid period setting unit A game machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (small win result) that is disadvantageous to a player.

According to feature B11 of the group of the present inventions, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature B12 of the invention group, the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path,
The player can cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means by causing the game ball to enter the same path as the game ball entering the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B13.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature B13 of the present invention group, the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path,
The player can cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means by causing the game ball to enter a path different from that for entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine
The player's intention can be surely reflected, and the player can play the game comfortably.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, it finally causes the display device to stop displaying a combination of specific symbols, etc., and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. There is a problem that the flow becomes monotonous when winning the lottery.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1.
Shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on the game board
), starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters, and said starting ball entering means A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the game ball. ,
expectation effect executing means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing, by the variable display means, an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state;
Specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 5
0,50A) and
The expected performance execution means is
an expected effect ending section (effect determination processing) for ending the expected effect triggered by the ball entering the specific ball entering means;
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expected effect ending unit enables the specific ball entering means by the specific ball entering setting unit, and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specified ball entering means. game machine.

According to feature C1 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect ending unit sets the specific ball entering means to be effective in the specific ball entering setting part, and terminates the expected effect triggered by a ball entering the specific ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
An invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting process) for setting an invalid period for invalidating the specific ball entry means in the specific ball entry setting unit,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, if the result of the internal lottery is advantageous for the player, the invalid period setting unit The game machine is characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of a disadvantageous internal lottery result.

According to the feature C2 of the group of the present inventions, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A ready-to-win display execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) is provided for executing a ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player. game machine.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means executes the ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Since the display execution part is provided, the player can see the ready-to-win display until finishing the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the specific ball-entering means, and can enjoy playing the game. . Further, when the specific ball entering means is set to be effective in the specific ball entering means, the player can terminate the ready-to-win display by causing the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to view the ready-to-win display, allowing the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the invention group,
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. with
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a specific control start section (game state transition processing ),
The internal lottery is
A first internal lottery result (small win result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state;
a second internal lottery result (jackpot result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result;
The ready-to-reach display execution unit, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery , a gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the ready-to-reach display executing unit determines that the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. When the result is the result, the ready-to-win display is executed by the variable display means, so that the player is made to expect that the result of the internal lottery was the result of the second internal lottery by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start section for starting the game in the specific control state when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transfer means, and the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. Since it is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to end the ready-to-win display and start the game in the specific control state, so that the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
The second internal lottery that provides the player with a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. and a lottery result.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result can cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be put out than the game balls, a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery can be given to the player. By executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control initiation unit
After setting the opening and closing ball-entering means to the open state until setting it to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game);
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results.

According to feature C6 of the present invention group, the result of the first internal lottery shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the opening/closing count of the open/close ball entry means to a predetermined number of times. The result of the second internal lottery is a specific control that can put out more game balls than a predetermined number by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. Since the game state can be shifted to the state, the ready-to-win display execution part makes the player further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in feature C6 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the result of the first internal lottery for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time;
Said second method for setting one opening/closing time of said opening/closing ball-entering means to a time longer than said predetermined time
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an internal lottery result of

According to feature C7 of the group of the present invention, the first internal lottery result is obtained by setting the opening/closing time of one opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time, and the second internal lottery result is one opening/closing ball entry means. is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, the game machine is capable of determining whether the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery. As compared with the case where the next internal lottery can be executed immediately, the variable display means can start variable display of a plurality of patterns. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in feature C6 or feature C7 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the number of times of opening and closing notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means triggered by the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means. A game machine characterized by comprising (effect determination processing).

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the opening and closing ball entry means is triggered by the entry into the specific ball entry means. Since an opening/closing frequency reporting unit for informing the player of the opening/closing frequency is provided, the player can confirm the opening/closing frequency of the opening/closing ball entry means by entering a game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of openings and closings of the opening/closing ball-entering means, so that the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A disadvantageous side internal lottery result that shifts to a game state disadvantageous to the player;
Transitioning to a game state more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state transitioned by the disadvantageous internal lottery result, and disguising the advantageous internal lottery result as if it were the disadvantageous game state;
The expected performance execution means is
As an expectation performance to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, the camouflage is canceled and the promotion performance to notify the player of the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side is displayed by the variable display. The game machine is characterized by comprising a promotion performance executing part executed by means.

According to feature C9 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect executing means cancels camouflage as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and the advantageous side internal lottery result is obtained. Since the promotion performance executing part is provided for executing the promotion performance for informing the player of the fact by the variable display means, the player ends the promotion performance by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. You can watch the promotion effect until it is activated, and you can play the game while enjoying it. Further, when the specific ball entering means is set to be effective in the specific ball entering means, the player can end the promotion performance by causing the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature C10 of the present invention group, the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path,
The player can cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means by causing the game ball to enter the same path as the game ball entering the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature C11 of the present invention group, the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path,
The player can cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means by causing the game ball to enter a path different from that for entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine
The player's intention can be surely reflected, and the player can play the game comfortably.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, in such a gaming machine, after starting the variable display of patterns, an expectation effect is executed to make the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player.

However, although the player's sense of expectation fluctuates according to the progress of the expected presentation, the player has to watch the expected presentation to the end, so there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable with this. be.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1.
Shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on the game board
), starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters, and said starting ball entering means A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the game ball. ,
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. and,
expectation effect executing means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing, by the variable display means, an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state;
Notification ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A and round Equipped with a number notification through gate 51),
The internal lottery is
a first internal lottery result (a small win result or a four-round best advantage result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
A second method of providing a player with a value higher than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out.
internal lottery result (jackpot result, 8 round best result, or 16 round best result),
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a payout information notification unit (effect decision processing).

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means relates to the payout of the game ball triggered by the entry into the notification ball entry means after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. Since a payout information reporting unit for reporting information to the player is provided, the player can confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball by entering the game ball into the reporting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control state is defined as one game (round game) from setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state to setting it to the closed state again,
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the payout information notification unit changes the number of openings and closings of the opening and closing ball entry means to the player when the ball enters the notification ball entry means. A game machine characterized by notifying a player of information regarding the payout of game balls by notifying the player of the game ball.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the payout information reporting unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state shifting means, and then activates the opening/closing ball-entering means when a ball enters the reporting means. By informing the player of the number of times of opening and closing, the player is notified of the information on the payout of the game ball, so the player can change the number of times of opening and closing the ball entry means by causing the notification ball entry means to enter the game ball. can be confirmed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entering means is arranged on the first path, the player can enter the game ball on the same path as when entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature D4 of the present invention group, the specific ball entering means is arranged on the second path, so that the player can enter the game ball on a different path than when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A notification ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the notification ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The payout information notifying unit notifies the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball triggered by the notification ball entry setting unit setting the notification ball entry means to be effective, and the entry of the ball into the notification ball entry means. A game machine characterized by notifying.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the payout information notification unit sets the notification ball entry means to be effective in the notification ball entry setting unit, and pays out game balls triggered by a ball entering the notification ball entry means. Since it is possible to notify the player of the information regarding the payout of the game balls, it is possible to diversify the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in feature D5 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting section (waiting time setting processing),
The invalid period setting unit provides the player with a value higher than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. In the case of the second internal lottery result to be awarded, the invalid period is longer than in the case of the first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. A game machine characterized by setting.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit shifts the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, thereby making the game more than the first internal lottery result. In the case of the second internal lottery result giving a high value to the player, the invalid period is compared with the case of the first internal lottery result shifting the game state to a specific control state capable of putting out a predetermined number of game balls. is set longer, the player's expectation can be heightened as the timing of informing the player of the information regarding the payout of game balls is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of internal lottery results with different numbers of game balls to be put out in a specific control state, and informs the player of information regarding the payout of the game balls when shifting to the specific control state. are doing.

However, the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game balls becomes monotonous, so there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1.
Shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on the game board
), starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters, and said starting ball entering means A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the game ball. ,
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. and,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state shift means, the variable display means executes an expectation performance that makes the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player. Expected effect execution means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100);
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 50) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a specific control start section (game state transition processing ),
The expected performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an expected performance end section (performance determination processing) for ending the expected performance with the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means as a trigger.

According to the feature E1 of the group of the present invention, the expected effect executing means expects the player to be in an advantageous state for the player after the game state shifting means shifts the game state to the specific control state. Expected performance is executed by the variable display means. In addition, since the expected performance executing means has an expected performance ending section for ending the expected performance with the entry of a ball into the specific ball entering means as a trigger, the player can enter the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Thus, the expected performance can be seen until the expected performance is finished, and the player can enjoy the game. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start section for starting the game in the specific control state when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transfer means, and the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. Since it is provided, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the expected performance, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A disadvantageous side internal lottery result (low probability result) that shifts to a game state disadvantageous to the player,
The advantageous side internal lottery result (the most advantageous) is disguised as if the player is in the disadvantageous game state while transitioning to a game state more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state shifted by the disadvantageous side internal lottery result. result) and prepare
The expected performance execution means is
As an expectation performance to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, the camouflage is canceled and the promotion performance to notify the player of the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side is displayed by the variable display. A game machine characterized by comprising a promotion performance execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) executed by means.

According to feature E2 of the group of the present invention, the expected effect executing means cancels disguise as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and the result is an advantageous side internal lottery result. Since the promotion effect execution part for notifying the player of the promotion effect is executed by the variable display means, the player is kept in the game state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started. to a specific control state, the promotion performance can be seen, and the game can be enjoyed. Also, the player can end the promotion effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. therefore,
The game machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion performance, and allows the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expected effect ending unit enables the specific ball entering means by the specific ball entering setting unit, and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specified ball entering means. game machine.

According to feature E3 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect ending section ends the expected effect triggered by the fact that the specific ball entry setting section effectively sets the specific ball entry means and the entry into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in feature E3 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting processing),
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, if the result of the internal lottery is advantageous for the player, the invalid period setting unit The game machine is characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of a disadvantageous internal lottery result.

According to feature E4 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of an internal lottery result that is advantageous to the player than in the case of the internal lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E4 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature E5 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entering means is arranged on the first path, the player can enter the game ball on the same path as when entering the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E4 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path, the player can enter the game ball on a different path than when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the game state will be advantageous to the player after shifting the game state to the specific control state.

However, regardless of whether or not the player is in an advantageous state, the player has to watch the expected effect to the end, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1.
Shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on the game board
), starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters, and said starting ball entering means A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the game ball. ,
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. and,
expected effect executing means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing an expected effect by the variable display means to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state;
A specific ball entry means (variable prize winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a specific control start section (game state transition processing ),
The expected performance execution means is
After the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means, an expected effect ending section (effect determination processing) for ending the expected effect triggered by the ball entering the specific ball entering means;
After the expected performance is executed by the variable display means, the content of the performance after the expected performance is terminated is changed based on the performance viewing period until the expected performance is terminated by the expected performance end section. A game machine characterized by comprising a production change section (production determination processing) for performing.

According to the characteristic feature F1 of the group of the present invention, the expected effect executing means terminates the expected effect triggered by the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. Since the expected performance ending part is provided, the player shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state shifting means until the expected performance is ended by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. The expected performance can be seen even after the game is finished, and the game can be enjoyed while enjoying the game. again,
The game state transition means includes a specific control start section for starting a game in the specific control state when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transfer means, and then when a ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the expected performance, and allows the player to play the game comfortably. Then, the expected effect execution means executes the expected effect by the variable display means, and then determines the effect after the expected effect is finished based on the effect viewing period until the expected effect is finished in the expected effect end part. Since the performance changing part for changing the contents is provided, the performance for the player whose performance viewing period is short can be differentiated from the performance for the player whose performance viewing period is long. Attention to the game can be improved.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the effect changing unit changes the effect during the game in the specific control state started by the specific control start unit (effect for opening/closing execution mode) based on the effect viewing period. .

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the effect change unit changes the effect during the game in the specific control state started by the specific control start unit based on the effect viewing period, so that the game with the short effect viewing period The effect during the game in the specific control state directed to the player can be made different from the effect during the game in the specific control state directed to the player having a long performance viewing period, thereby increasing the attention of the player to the game. can be improved.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2 of the present invention group,
The game machine, wherein the effect change unit changes the next expected effect to be executed by the variable display means based on the effect viewing period.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the effect changing unit changes the next expected effect to be executed by the variable display means based on the effect viewing period. can be made different from the next expected performance directed to the player who has spent a long time viewing the performance, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A ready-to-win display execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) for executing a ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Characteristic game machine.

According to the characteristic feature F4 of the group of the present invention, the expected effect executing means executes the ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Since the display executing section is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to view the ready-to-win display, allowing the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A first internal lottery result (small win result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state;
a second internal lottery result (jackpot result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result;
The ready-to-reach display execution unit, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery , a gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to feature F5 of the present invention group, the ready-to-reach display executing unit determines that the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. When the result is the result, the ready-to-win display is executed by the variable display means, so that the player is made to expect that the result of the internal lottery was the result of the second internal lottery by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature F6.
In the game machine described in feature F5 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
The second internal lottery that provides the player with a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. and a lottery result.

According to feature F6 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result can cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be put out than the game balls, a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery can be given to the player. By executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result.

Feature F7.
In the game machine described in feature F6 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control initiation unit
After setting the opening and closing ball-entering means to the open state until setting it to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game);
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results.

According to feature F7 of the present invention group, the result of the first internal lottery shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the opening/closing count of the open/close ball entry means to a predetermined number of times. The result of the second internal lottery is a specific control that can put out more game balls than a predetermined number by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. Since the game state can be shifted to the state, the ready-to-win display execution part makes the player further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature F8.
In the game machine described in feature F7 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the result of the first internal lottery for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time;
Said second method for setting one opening/closing time of said opening/closing ball-entering means to a time longer than said predetermined time
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an internal lottery result of

According to feature F8 of the group of the present invention, the first internal lottery result is set to a predetermined time for opening and closing the opening and closing ball entry means once, and the second internal lottery result is one opening and closing ball entry means. is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, the game machine is capable of determining whether the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery. As compared with the case of , the game in the specific control state can be ended immediately, and the next internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine described in feature F7 or feature F8 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the number of times of opening and closing notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means triggered by the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means. A game machine characterized by comprising (effect determination processing).

According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the opening and closing ball entry means is triggered by the entry into the specific ball entry means. Since an opening/closing frequency reporting unit for informing the player of the opening/closing frequency is provided, the player can confirm the opening/closing frequency of the opening/closing ball entry means by entering a game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of openings and closings of the opening/closing ball-entering means, so that the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature F10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9 of the present invention group,
A game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and another ball entry means (out port 39) different from the specific ball entry means is provided,
The specific control start unit, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, starts the game in the specific control state triggered by the ball entering the other ball-entering means,
The expected effect ending unit terminates the expected effect when starting the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. machine.

According to the feature F10 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then enters a ball into the specific ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means Since a game in a specific control state is started when a ball enters a different ball-entering means, the ball enters the other ball-entering means even if the ball does not enter the specified ball-entering means. can be used as a trigger to start a game in a specific control state.

Feature F11.
In the gaming machine described in feature F10 of the invention group,
The specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time elapses, the specific control state is changed to the specific control state triggered by the ball entering the other ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by starting a game.

According to the characteristic feature F11 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time elapses, a ball is entered into another ball entry means. Since the game in the specific control state is started as , even if the ball does not enter the specific ball entering means, the game in the specific control state can be started with the entry of the ball into another ball entering means as a trigger. can be done.

Feature F12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, starts the game in the specific control state when a specific time has elapsed,
The expected effect ending unit terminates the expected effect when starting the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. machine.

According to the feature F12 of the present invention group, the specific control starting section shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means or the specific time has elapsed. Since the game in the specific control state is started with this as a trigger, the game in the specific control state can be started even if the ball is not entered into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the game machine can reliably start the game in the specific control state after the game state transfer means shifts the game state to the specific control state, and the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature F13.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F12 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expected effect ending unit enables the specific ball entering means by the specific ball entering setting unit, and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specified ball entering means. game machine.

According to feature F13 of the group of the present invention, the expected performance end unit sets the specific ball entry setting unit to enable the specific ball entry means, and terminates the expectation performance triggered by the entry into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F14.
In the gaming machine described in feature F13 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting processing),
If the result of the internal lottery (jackpot result) that is advantageous to the player is based on the result of the internal lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the invalid period setting unit A game machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (small win result) that is disadvantageous to a player.

According to the feature F14 of the group of the present inventions, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F15.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature F15 of the present invention group, the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path,
The player can cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means by causing the game ball to enter the same path as the game ball entering the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F16.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature F16 of the present invention group, the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path,
The player can cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means by causing the game ball to enter a path different from that for entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine
The player's intention can be surely reflected, and the player can play the game comfortably.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, in such a gaming machine, after starting the variable display of patterns, an expectation effect is executed so that the player expects that the game state will shift to a specific control state.

However, regardless of whether or not the player wins the jackpot lottery, the player has to watch the expected performance to the end, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

10... Pachinko machine 35... General winning opening 36... Upper operating opening 37... Lower operating opening 38... Variable winning device 38a... Large winning opening 38b... Open/close door 38c... Variable winning driving section 39... Out Mouth, 51... Symbol display device, 60... Main control device, 62... MPU, 90... Sound emission control device,
92...MPU, 100...Display control device, 102...MPU.

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of internal lottery results with different numbers of game balls to be put out in a specific control state, and informs the player of information regarding the payout of the game balls when shifting to the specific control state. are doing .

JP 2005-074175 A

However, the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game balls becomes monotonous, so there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on a game board, and game balls flowing down the game area can enter. a starting ball entry means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the entry of a game ball; and a plurality of and a variable display means for variably displaying the pattern of the game ball, and the game is brought into a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of a predetermined lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A game state transition means capable of changing the state, an expectation performance execution means for executing an expectation performance by the variable display means to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and the game area. a game ball flowing down can be entered, and based on the entry of the game ball, the expected effect execution means is provided with information useful for the player, and the predetermined lottery is: A first lottery result for shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out, and a game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out. and a second lottery result that gives the player a value higher than the first lottery result, and the expected performance execution means changes the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means. A payout information notification means is provided for notifying the player of information regarding the payout of the game ball in the specific control state after the transition, triggered by the entry of the ball into the notification ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board and the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the game ball. A start ball entry means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the ball entry, and a plurality of patterns are variably displayed based on the results of the prescribed lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. and variable display means for changing the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of a predetermined lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A game state transition means, an expected effect executing means for executing an expected effect by the variable display means to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and a game ball flowing down the game area. is capable of entering the game ball, and information useful for the player is notified to the expected effect execution means based on the entry of the game ball, and the predetermined lottery is performed by a predetermined number of game balls. , and by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, the first and a second lottery result that gives the player a higher value than the first lottery result, and the expected effect executing means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state shift means, A payout information notification means is provided for notifying the player of information regarding the payout of the game ball in the specific control state when the ball enters the notification ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's attention to the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing Diagram showing an example of reach display A diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when a ball enters a variable prize-winning thru-gate when a ready-to-win display occurs. A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning thru gate when the reach display occurs A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the game result is "few rounds high probability result" A diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the ready-to-win display occurs. A diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning thru gate when the reach display occurs The front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of standby time setting processing A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning thru gate when the reach display occurs The figure which shows the flowchart of the game round control process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. A diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing A diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when a ball enters a variable winning through gate at the time of a promotion effect. A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the through gate for variable prize winning at the time of the promotion effect. A diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs. A diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs. Front view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A view showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the through gate for informing the number of rounds during the execution of the effect for the open/close execution mode. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the through gate for informing the number of rounds during execution of the effect for the open/close execution mode. The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing A diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when a ball enters a through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. A diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. A diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device when a ball does not enter a through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. A diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. A display screen G of a ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game round when a ball enters the through gate for variable prize winning before the waiting time for the round game has passed and the game result is a "special loss result". diagram showing Shown is a display screen G of a ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game round when a ball enters a variable prize-winning through gate after the waiting time for the round game has passed and the game result is a "special loss result". figure

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. This pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted into the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion 23, and includes speaker units 24 for outputting sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both are provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper tray 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and while aligning them in a line, moves them toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 4). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35 provided at each opening, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out port 39 . The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a variable winning through gate 50 provided on the right side of the central portion.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 has a detection sensor 40a, the upper working opening 36 has a detecting sensor 40b, the lower working opening 37 has a detecting sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 has a detecting sensor 40d. It has The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 37. - 特許庁The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 4) for detecting entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 4) for detecting an entry of a game ball. When a ball enters each through gate 41, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning slot.
The variable winning thru gate 50 includes a detection sensor 40g (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball. When a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Also, entering the through gate 41 and the variable winning through gate 50 means that the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 and the variable prize winning through gate 50 is also referred to as a prize in the same manner as the ball entering various prize winning openings.

The upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 31 . Each operating port 36, 37 is opened upward to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation port 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. Also, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation opening 36 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower It may be configured to switch between the operation port 37 and the state in which the game ball is likely to win. In addition, the lower operation port 37 may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by displacing the lower operation port 37. 37 may not include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an open/close door 38b. A variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
The player hits to the right by maximizing the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 consists of a transparent (or translucent) panel 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque panel 381a provided around the transparent panel 381a. and a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. 31, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

The variable prize-winning thru gate 50 serves as a trigger for starting a round game when a shift to the opening/closing execution mode is won in an internal lottery and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.
Thus, in the present embodiment, the variable winning thru gate 50 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters, the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) game (round game) It functions as a specific entry means that starts the

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a character object display unit 46, and includes a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display device, and other display devices. arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In this way, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as starting ball entry means for performing an internal lottery upon entry of the game ball while allowing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and character object display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
In this way, the symbol display device 47 is a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. function as
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, and a pattern display. a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47;

The first reservation lamp part 49a is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
Note that each of the holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a portion of the pattern display device 47, which will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, eight kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. In addition, in FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from when the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 until the predetermined stop result is displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 47 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63. The RAM 64 is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. 45 and the character object display unit 46 .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40a to 40g detect the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, various winning ports of the variable winning device 38, the out port 39, the variable winning through gate 50, and each through gate 41. are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each other. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) for various prize winning ports, the out port 39, the variable prize winning through gate 50, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40g. . In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS and C3. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, and uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win when the big win occurs. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display duration time on the main display section 45. FIG. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C3 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is to be in the electric role open state. The counters C1, C2, CINI, CS and C3 are provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 4).

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C3 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the RAM 64 as acquisition information storage means at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the provided reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4). Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C3 is stored in the electric role holding area 64c (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. The MPU 62 stores sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 as reservation information in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 in chronological order. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the first result display portion reservation area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation opening 36 are reserved. In addition, the first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. The MPU 62 stores sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 as reservation information in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 in chronological order. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. The second result display portion reservation area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C3 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C3 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be.
Then, based on the value of the electric role product open counter C3 stored in the electric role holding area 64c, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric role object release lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state more times when the electric role open state is won, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time of one time to do is also getting longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operating port 37 is higher than the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two win/fail lottery modes of a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes a success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is.
On the other hand, under the game state in which the win/fail table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Here, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. .

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win win" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". All of these outliers are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Specifically, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to when the lottery for the occurrence of the big win is made, the random number value for the "special loss result" is 28, as shown in FIG. 6(a). is one.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is one. Here, the values of the random numbers that become the "special unsuccessful results" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode include the values of the random numbers that become the "special unsuccessful results" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. not present.
The value of the random number stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode that becomes the "special failure result" includes the value of the random number that becomes the "special failure result" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. good too.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 7, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 7A, includes "low-probability results (special distribution results for low-probability)", "small-round high-probability results (high-probability results for few-rounds)", and a plurality of distribution results of "Most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 19” are distributed to “low round high ``Probable result'' and ``20 to 29'' are assigned to ``Most favorable result''.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 7(b), has two distribution results of "low probability result" and "best result" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 29” are the “best results” ”.
Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the two distribution results of the "low-probability result" and the "best result" are particularly the big win results.

Each sorting result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
The "few-round high-probability result" and "most advantageous result" are sorting results in which the win-fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "few-round high-probability result" and the "best result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display continuation time on the main display section 45 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C3. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C3 by adding 1 to each, and stores the updated values in the RAM 64. is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C3 to 0 and clears them if the previous values of the counters C1 to C3 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added to them.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp part 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 49c is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In addition, in the winning process for through, the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 when it is determined that the detection sensor 40g corresponding to the through gate 50 for variable winning has detected the winning of the game ball. . This round game execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50 .

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper working port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper working port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S202, the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is grasped, and the reserved number is determined. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the lower working opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as the second start pending storage number RbN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 checks in step S205 if the number of starting suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start suspension memory number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operation port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending memory number N and updates it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores the combination of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area for the result display section, that is, In step S206, it is stored as suspension information in a storage area corresponding to the number N of start suspension storages updated.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending storage number RaN in step S202, the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process is set to the first The hold information is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the result display portion hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 stores "4" in the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process The hold information is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second result display portion hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 or the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of 4 pieces, and the first reservation lamp part 49a or the second reservation lamp part 49b is the reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the command for that effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 47, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the lower working port 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C3 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also executes the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing of step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether the current normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S508 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502 it determines whether the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S508.

First, the processing for starting a game round in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed for setting the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", it executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the upper operation opening 36 The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 49a as the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 6A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 6B) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or step S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as described above, the winning result is one of "big win winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". The same is true for

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", it executes the processing from step S706 onwards. , the processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, the process (process after step S706) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 7A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second sorting table (see FIG. 7B) is read from the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45. A decision is made according to the sorting result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the allocation result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, the MPU 62 sets a low probability result flag when specifying that the sorting result is a "low probability result", and specifies that it is a "small round high probability result" sets a few-round high-probability result flag, and sets a most-favorable result flag when it is identified as the "most favorable result". Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S712) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/loss result is not the "big hit win" in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is the "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S712. , the process after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special loss result stored in advance in the ROM 63 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning result is the "special losing result" by referring to this special losing flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal outlier result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting the display duration (display duration) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 .

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the symbol display device 47 will display the ready-to-win state. Specifically, the MPU 62 generates a ready-to-win display when the winning result determined in step S704 is "big win winning" and when the winning result determined in step S704 is "special losing result". Then judge.

This ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when "big win" or "special loss result" is obtained in the lottery.
Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having a number of is stopped on the activated line L. In addition, when "big win winning" is obtained in the winning lottery and "low probability result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the effective line L.

In addition, when a "special loss result" is obtained in the winning lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of the symbols of the ready-to-win display (a single number and a plurality of identical numbers different from this number) as a stop result. symbol combination) is stopped on the activated line L.
Furthermore, in the case of "big win winning" in the winning lottery and "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the pattern display device 47 displays the combination of the symbols of the ready-to-win display on the effective line L. After temporarily stopping display, the stop result is not a combination of symbols with the same number or a combination of symbols with reach display, but it will be selected in the case of a "normal result" in the winning lottery. A combination of special symbols having numbers different from each other is stopped on the activated line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to the "best result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. ), when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "big hit" in the winning lottery and is distributed to the "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery), and reach display Occurs when the combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when a "special result" is obtained in the winning lottery). Further, the ready-to-win display does not occur when a combination different from any of the above-described combinations is finally stopped and displayed (when a "normal result" is obtained in the winning lottery).

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By stopping and displaying, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the ready-to-win display, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the pattern display device 47 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, Players can be expected to be sorted into a "low probability result" or "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". Instead of facilitating the occurrence of effects, this advance notice display may facilitate the selection of effects with a low appearance rate, or may be combined.
A lottery as to whether or not to generate the advance notice display is executed by the sound emission control device 90 .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the change type counter obtained from the change type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach display table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 A display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, so that the change type counter A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 36 increases. Further, the display duration time when the pending information related to the lower working port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the lower working port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

At step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to sorting results. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "low probability result", "few rounds high probability result", and "best result" as information related to the sorting result.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command contains information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S508 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 controls the display of the main display section 45 so that the main display section 45 displays the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 behaves in the same manner as in the case of winning a lottery to generate a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S816 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S812 onward.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the success/failure result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S804.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the success/failure result is a "special failure result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the big winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", i.e., if it determines that the win/loss result is the "jackpot winning", in step S806, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S807 the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not the high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "low probability result" or the "best result", step In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning hole 38a has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning hole 38a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) Elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing any of the processes of steps S805, S807, and S808, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S809. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S810, the MPU 62 sets "50000" to the timer counter WT provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game. The value set in the timer counter WT is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the round game is 100 sec. It should be noted that the waiting time for the round game is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S811, MPU62 clears the round game execution flag memorize|stored in RAM64. In other words, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag set in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.
Also, in step S811, the MPU 62 sets an opening execution flag in the RAM 64. FIG. This opening execution flag is a flag for specifying that the opening/closing execution mode has been entered and the round game can be started with the entry of the ball into the variable prize-winning through gate 50 as a trigger.
After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S812) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is in the open/close execution mode will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, and determines whether or not the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 and determines that the value of the timer counter WT is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812, or determines that the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less, step S813 , the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the big winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the big winning opening 38a is open in step S901, it executes the processing after step S906.

First, in step S901, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, in step S903, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S904, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
In the following, a detailed description will be given of the big winning opening opening process in step S904.

<Grand Prize Opening Processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1010 as shown in FIG.
In step S<b>1001 , the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening execution flag is set in the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the opening execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes the processing from step S1004.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the opening execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1001, it sets an opening command in step S1002. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S1002 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

In step S<b>1003 , the MPU 62 clears the opening execution flag stored in the RAM 64 . In other words, the MPU 62 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, starts the round game with the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger, and then issues the opening command only when the large winning opening opening process is executed for the first time. set.

After step S1003 is executed, or if it is determined in step S1001 that the opening execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the processing after step S1004 is executed.
In step S1004, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1004 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1005, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1006, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1004 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1007, it sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1008, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1008 that the result of allocation is the low-round high-probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1006.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1008 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1009. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1006 or step S1009, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 38a in step S1010. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1005 or step S1007 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1006 or step S1009 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S905 will be explained with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S905 after executing the big winning opening opening process in step S904. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S905 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S906) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S901 will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuous time set in the timer counter T in step S1006 or step S1009 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S918.

First, the processing (processing after step S907) when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 38a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 38a, in step S908, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S910 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S912, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S923, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S913.
In step S913, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S914, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S915. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S917, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S918) when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/loss result is a "big hit", it executes the processing from step S921 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S923.

First, the processing (processing after step S921) when the MPU 62 determines that the win/fail result is not the “special losing result” in step S920 will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S922, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after S916 described above.

Next, the process (process after step S923) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result" in step S912 or step S920 will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after S916 described above.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S814 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813, the MPU 62 checks in step S814 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S814 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S814 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", in step S815 the value of the timer counter T is set to " 0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S815 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S815 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S816, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1109 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result", the processing from step S1102 onwards is executed.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1105.

First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result" will be described.
At step S1102, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

At step S1103, the MPU 62 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big win" is won in the winning lottery when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

At step S1104, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low-probability result flag, low-probability result flag, few-round high-probability result flag, and most advantageous result flag) in the RAM 64 according to the sorting result. Or clear the special out flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. there is

Next, the processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 62 determines whether the sorting result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (when it determines that the win-or-fail result is the "special outlier result"), it terminates the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the sorting result is the "low-probability result", it executes the processing after step S1106.

In step S1106, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than a "low-probability result".

In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.
In step S1109, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
The MPU 62 maintains the number limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery becomes a "best result" or a "few rounds high probability result", the game state is the current game. Regardless of the state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), it shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812 of the game state transition processing, in step S813, the large winning opening opening/closing processing is executed. there is In other words, the game state transition processing is a specific control start section that, after shifting the game state to the open/close execution mode by the MPU 62, starts the game in the open/close execution mode with the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger. function as

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 38 has an open state (a state in which the open/close door 38b is set to an open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered. It has a closed state (a state in which the open/close door 38b is set to a closed state), and functions as open/close ball entry means for paying out a predetermined game ball when a game ball is entered.
In the game state transition processing, one game (round game) in the open/close execution mode is performed after the variable winning device 38 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again.

Further, in this embodiment, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" at step S812 of the game state transition processing, it executes the big winning opening opening/closing processing at step S813. ing. In other words, in the game state transition process, the game in the opening/closing execution mode is started when 100 sec (specific time) has elapsed after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the MPU 62 .
In the present embodiment, the game state transition process starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode when 100 sec (specific time) has elapsed after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the MPU 62. However, the game in the opening/closing execution mode may be started when a different time has passed, or the game in the opening/closing execution mode may not be started when the specific time has passed. For example, in the game state transition processing, after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the MPU 62, the game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and the variable winning through gate 50 (specific ball entry means) is A game in the opening/closing execution mode may be started with the entry of a ball into other means such as a different out port 39 as a trigger, and the entry into the other means of entry and the elapse of a specific time are used in combination. good too. At this time, if all the ball entry means provided in the game area are replaced with other ball entry means, the gaming machine can start a game in a specific control state triggered by the shooting of the game ball into the game area. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10, in the low-probability mode, has a left-handed route (first route) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, and an upper operating route. Equipped with a right-handed route (second route) that makes it more difficult for game balls to enter the opening 36 and the lower operating port 37 compared to the left-handed route, and the variable prize-winning through gate 50 is designed for the right-handed route. are arranged.
In this embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50 is arranged on the right-handed route, but may be arranged on the left-handed route.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 19, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. This ROM 93 has various areas such as a reach table storage area 93a.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile RAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S1201 to S1205, as shown in FIG.

In step S1201, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1202, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like.
In step S1203, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S1202. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24. FIG.

In step S<b>1204 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S1205, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing in step S1202 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1315 as shown in FIG.

In step S1301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1309 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has been received, in step S1302, based on the content of the type command, the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result". result”.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result", in step S1303, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S1304, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not it is “Few Rounds High Probability Result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", in step S1305, it executes common symbol determination processing. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects different numbers that will not be selected in the case of a "normal failure result" in the winning lottery, instead of a combination of symbols having the same number or a combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display. Determine the special symbol combination (eg, "3, 4, 1") that you have.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is not the "few rounds high probability result", in step S1306, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for the losing result. In this outlier result symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command. Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "special failure result", it determines that the ready-to-win display occurs, and when it determines that the game result is a "normal failure result", It is determined that reach indication does not occur.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S1303, S1305, and S1306, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S1307. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S1307, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1203 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1308, the MPU 92 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S1303, S1305 and S1306. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1308, or when determining in step S1301 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1309 and subsequent steps.
In step S1309, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1315.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that the opening command has been received, in step S1310, whether the effect duration time selected in the effect pattern determination process in step S1307 has elapsed. determine whether or not

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1310 that the effect continuation time has elapsed, it executes the processing from step S1312 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1310 that the effect continuation time has not passed, in step S1311 the effect end process is executed. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307.

After executing the process of step S1311, or when it is determined that the effect duration time has elapsed in step S1310, the MPU 92 determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command in step S1312.

In step S1313, the MPU 92 executes processing for determining the opening/closing execution mode effect corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1312. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when determining that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “few rounds high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. In addition, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1203 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S1314, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S1313. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S1314, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1315 and subsequent steps.
In step S1315, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. , and a distribution result of "low-probability result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 22, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the win/loss lottery (symbol x in the figure). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift. In addition, in the "special failure result", the stop result is a combination of ready-to-win display symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. In addition, the support mode does not shift in the "special outlier result".

In the "few round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of times being two, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. . In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "few-round high-probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode.
Therefore, the player can grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "few rounds high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times in a long time mode. times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open/close execution mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If so, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Become. Additionally, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the "best result". can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, so that the game result is the "best result". and "low-probability results" cannot be grasped.

Then, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the pattern display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display on the display screen G an image that clearly indicates that the high probability mode is selected, and the high frequency support mode is set such that the number of game rounds is the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) is reached, an image is displayed on the display screen G to notify that the mode will be shifted to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 will cause the opening/closing execution mode effect to be the final effect D in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends. If so, the game result is camouflaged as if it were a "low-probability result".

Then, when the sorting result is the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 does not become a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and is in the high probability mode after 100 game rounds are completed. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1307 of the effect determination process. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1404 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display.
Specifically, the MPU 92, based on the content of the command for variation, determines if the game result is a "most advantageous result", a "low probability result", a "few rounds high probability result", or a "special unsuccessful result". It is determined to generate the ready-to-win display, and when the game result is "out of normal result", it is determined not to generate the ready-to-win display.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 that the ready-to-win display is to be generated, in step S1402, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the effect continuation time for generating the ready-to-win. In the processing for setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation, the MPU 92 sets a time (for example, 90 sec) slightly shorter than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 as the effect duration. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the effect duration time by referring to the reach generation effect duration table stored in the reach table storage area 93 a of the ROM 93 . This ready-to-win effect continuation time table stores a plurality of ready-to-win indications and a plurality of effect continuation times respectively corresponding to the plurality of ready-to-win indications in association with each other.
Here, the duration of the ready-to-win display is the total time of the display duration included in the variation command and the presentation duration.

In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter than the wait time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 as the presentation duration time. The same time as the time may be set as the presentation continuation time, or a longer time than the standby time for the round game may be set as the presentation continuation time. Moreover, the MPU 92 may set the effect duration time so that the ready-to-win display is continued without ending. In this case, the ready-to-win display is performed by, for example, slowing down the image, repeating the image, or stopping the image and making the player hit the push button repeatedly to extend the effect of the ready-to-win display. may be configured.

After executing step S1402, the MPU 92 executes reach display setting processing in step S1403. In this ready-to-win display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets a ready-to-win display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1402.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 that the ready-to-win display does not occur, in step S1404, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the effect continuation time for non-to-win reach. In the processing for setting the non-reach effect duration time, the MPU 92 sets the effect duration time to the same time as the display duration time included in the variation command.
After executing the process of step S1403 or the process of step S1404, the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of reach display. Specifically, FIG. 24(A) is a view showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in the state of progressing the ready-to-win display, and FIG. 24(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 after the elapse of the effect duration time when the game result is "low probability result", and FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 47 after the effect duration time has elapsed in the case of a "special loss result".

As shown in FIG. 24A, the MPU 102 shifts to the ready-to-win display by reducing the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G. . In this ready-to-win display, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them in the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. and fight with the demon that exists on the left side.
In addition to demons, characters that fight with angels are also available. A character who fights with this angel is randomly selected each time the reach display occurs.

The MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether or not the angel wins the battle after the effect duration time has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. The player is notified that the game result is the ``most advantageous result'' or ``low probability result'' by making the angel win. In addition, when the game result is a “few rounds high probability result” or a “special loss result”, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The player is notified that the game result is a ``few-round high-probability result'' or a ``special out-of-match result'' by making the devil win the game.

<About the flow when the reach display occurs>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the variable prize-winning thru-gate at the occurrence of the ready-to-win display. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning thru gate when the ready-to-win display occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 25A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. 25B and 25D are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. FIG. 25(C) and (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G after the ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50. FIG.
25(B) and (C) show the display screen G when the game result is the "best result", and the same applies when the game result is the "low probability result". be. FIGS. 25(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G when the game result is "special loss result".

FIG. 26A is a timing chart showing the state of the variable display on the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 26B is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the pattern display device 47 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 26(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable prize-winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 26D is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 25A, reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

Thereafter, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 26A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the performance continuation time, as shown in FIG. 26B, the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812, as shown in FIG.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when executing the big winning opening opening process of step S904 for the first time after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

If it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has been received before the effect duration time elapses after the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 executes effect end processing in step S1311. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 26(B).
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the ready-to-win display before the effect continuation time elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." It is suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by pressing, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Here, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize them. Therefore, when the ready-to-win display occurs, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the big win has been won. By daringly confirming the display section 45, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player as to whether or not it is confirmed whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the reach display by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Although it is suggested to the player that it can be done, other methods may be used to suggest to the player that the player can hit right and skip the ready-to-win display. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements light-emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable prize-winning thru gate 50, and emits light from the light-emitting means so that the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right. You may suggest to the player.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "best result", it selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and displays the angels as shown in FIG. 25(B). By making the player win, the ready-to-win display is terminated and the player is informed that the game result is the ``best result'' or ``low probability result''.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25(C), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect C or effect D) on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "special loss result", the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Then, when the game result is a "special failure result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and causes the devil to win, as shown in FIG. 25(D). The display is terminated and the player is informed that the game result is a "special loss result".
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25(E), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect A) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the game result is "few rounds, high probability result".
Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Then, when the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 27A, displays the symbol row Stop the variable display of Z1 to Z3 and let the devil win.

Next, the MPU 102 restarts the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as shown in FIG. 27(B).
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27(C), the MPU 102 ends the ready-to-win display by finally stop-displaying the combination of special symbols, and confirms that the game result is a "few-round high-probability result". is notified to the player, and based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the pattern display device 47 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect B).

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning thru gate when the ready-to-win display occurs. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning thru gate when the ready-to-win display occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 28A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. FIG. 28(B) is a view showing the display screen G when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50 . FIGS. 28C and 28E are diagrams showing the display screen G when the presentation duration time has elapsed. FIGS. 28(D) and (F) are diagrams showing the display screen G after the effect duration time has elapsed.
28(C) and (D) are diagrams showing the display screen G when the game result is the "best result", and the same applies when the game result is the "low probability result". be. FIGS. 25(E) and (F) are diagrams showing the display screen G when the game result is "special loss result".

FIG. 29A is a timing chart showing the state of the variable display on the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 29(B) is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the pattern display device 47 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 29(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 29(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 28A, reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

Thereafter, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 29A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the effect duration time, as shown in FIGS. 28(B) and 29(B), the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" in step S812 without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813 is executed (timing T3).

Here, after the ready-to-win display occurs, if the ball does not enter the variable winning thru-gate 50, after the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307 is finished, that is, the ready-to-win display is performed. (timing T13), the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813.
In the present embodiment, the waiting time for the round game is set to 100 sec, so if the effect duration is set to 90 sec, the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 after 10 sec has passed after finishing the ready-to-win display. It will be.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when executing the big winning opening opening process of step S904 for the first time after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "best result", it selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and displays the angels as shown in FIG. 28(C). By making the player win, the ready-to-win display is terminated and the player is notified that the game result is the ``best result'' or ``low probability result''.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28(D), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect C or effect D) on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "special loss result", it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Then, when the game result is a "special failure result", as shown in FIG. The display is ended and the player is notified that the game result is a "special loss result".
After that, the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect A) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. 28(F).

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and displays the devil when the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", as in the case when the game result is the "special failure result". Win (see FIG. 27(A)).

Next, the MPU 102 restarts the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 27(B)).
Thereafter, the MPU 102 terminates the ready-to-win display and informs the player that the game result is a "few round high-probability result" by finally stopping and displaying the combination of special symbols. Based on the transmitted opening/closing execution mode command, the effect (effect B) for the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the pattern display device 47 (see FIG. 27(C)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 provide an expectation effect (a state advantageous to the player) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the opening/closing execution mode. The pattern display device 47 functions as an expected effect executing means for executing an expected effect that makes the player expect that the symbol display device 47 will

Further, in the present embodiment, the determination processing of the effect pattern is performed by the pattern display device 47 as an expectation effect that the player expects that the game state will shift to the open/close execution mode. It functions as an executive part.
In the present embodiment, the effect determination process is an expectation effect that terminates the ready-to-win display when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60. Acts as a terminator.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the expected effect adopts the ready-to-win display, but other expected effects such as advance notice display may be used. In short, the expected effect may be any effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 is the first internal lottery result ( a special winning result), and a big win result (low-probability result and most advantageous result) as a second internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode and gives the player a higher value than the small win result. It has Then, the determination processing of the effect pattern is performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 is a small winning result or a big winning result, ready-to-win display. is executed by the symbol display device 47 .

Specifically, the internal lottery shifts the game state to an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening/closing times of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number (twice in this embodiment). Opening and closing execution that can put out more game balls than a predetermined number by setting the result of a small hit and the number of opening and closing times of the variable winning device 38 to a number greater than a predetermined number (15 times in this embodiment). By shifting the game state to the mode, it is provided with a big win result (low-probability result and most profitable result) that gives a higher value to the player than the small win result.
In this embodiment, the second internal lottery result gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed. By setting the opening time of the variable winning device 38, etc., a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery may be awarded to the player. In short, the result of the second internal lottery should give the player a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small winning result is set to a predetermined time for one opening and closing time of the variable winning device 38 (short time mode), and the big winning result (low probability result and most advantageous result) is the variable winning device The opening and closing time of 38 is set to a time longer than the predetermined time (long time mode).
Incidentally, in the small winning result, the opening and closing time of the variable winning device 38 may be set to a shorter time than that in the big winning result, or may be set to the same time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is performed by shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 60, and then determining the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger. It also functions as an opening/closing number notification unit that notifies the player of the opening and closing times. Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by selecting effects A to D as effects for the opening/closing execution mode.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then terminate the ready-to-win display when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. Since the game player enters the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50, the game state is changed to the open/close execution mode by the main controller 60 until the ready-to-win display is finished. The ready-to-win display can be seen even after the shift, and the game can be played while enjoying the game.
(2) After the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode, the main controller 60 starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode when the ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50. Since the transition processing is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display and start the game in the open/close execution mode by entering the game ball into the variable prize-winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to see the ready-to-win display, and allows the player to comfortably play the game.

(3) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform a ready-to-win display on the pattern display device 47 as an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Since the pattern determining process is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to see the ready-to-win display, and allows the player to comfortably play the game.
(4) The effect pattern determination process is executed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 and the lower operation opening 37 is a small winning result or a big winning result. Since the display is performed by the symbol display device 47, the player can expect that the result of the internal lottery is a big winning result by performing the ready-to-win display.

(5) The result of a small win can shift the game state to an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the result of a big win is an open/close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. By shifting the game state to , it is possible to give the player a value higher than the result of the small win. It is possible to make the player further expect that there has been.
(6) The results of the small wins are variable. By setting the number of openings and closings of the winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times, the game state can be shifted to an opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the results of the big wins are variable. By setting the number of times of opening and closing the winning device 38 to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state can be shifted to an opening/closing execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out, thus resulting in an effect pattern. In the decision process of (1), by executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was a jackpot result.

(7) The result of the small win is set to a predetermined time for opening and closing the variable winning device 38, and the result of the big win is to set the time to open and close the variable winning device 38 to a time longer than the predetermined time. When the result of the internal lottery is a small win, the pachinko machine 10 can end the game in the opening/closing execution mode more quickly than when the internal lottery results in a big win. , the following internal lottery can be performed: Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.
(8) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the variable winning device 38 is triggered by the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50. The game player can check the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by entering a game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to check the number of openings and closings of the variable prize winning device 38, so that the player can comfortably play the game.

(9) In the game state transition processing, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing is executed when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 or when a specific time has elapsed. Since the game of the mode is started, the game of the opening/closing execution mode can be started even when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely start the game in the opening/closing execution mode after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60, and the player can play the game comfortably. .
(10) Since the variable prize-winning thru-gate 50 is arranged on the right-handed route, the player can pass the game ball through a path different from the case of entering the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 and the lower operation opening 37. A game ball can enter the variable winning through gate 50 by shooting. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect determination process is performed by shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 60, and then using the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger for the variable winning. It also functions as an opening/closing times notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening/closing times of the device 38 . Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by selecting effects A to D as effects for the opening/closing execution mode.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, the variable winning thru gate 50 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters the game, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 It functions as a notification entry means for notifying users of useful information. In the effect determination process, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger. It functions as a payout information reporting unit.

According to this, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger. Since the player is provided with an effect determination process for informing the player of the information on the payout of the game ball, the player can confirm the information on the payout of the game ball by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed ("big hit winning" in the winning lottery, "most advantageous result" or " If it is distributed to "low probability result"), when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to "small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery ), and when the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display is finally stopped and displayed (when a "special loss result" occurs in the winning lottery).
On the other hand, the ready-to-win display may occur when a game result other than these results is obtained.
This also applies to each of the following embodiments. For example, the reach display should occur when it becomes a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to the "unspecified small round high probability result (latency high probability result for small round)" in the distribution lottery. may The "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" is a sorting result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode.

Specifically, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". Then, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". Then, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends.
The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 30 is a front view of a game board according to the second embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the variable winning through gate 50 provided on the right side of the central portion.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 has a variable winning through gate 50A provided on the left side of the central portion as shown in FIG. 30 instead of the variable winning through gate 50. It is different from the first embodiment in this point.
The variable winning thru gate 50A has the same function as the variable winning thru gate 50 except for its position.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10, in the low-probability mode, has a left-handed route (first route) that tends to cause game balls to enter the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, Equipped with a right-handed route (second route) in which game balls are less likely to enter the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 than the left-handed route, and the variable prize-winning thru gate 50A is a left-handed through gate. placed on the route.
In the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 50A is arranged on the left-handed route, but may be arranged on the right-handed route.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game state transition process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the game state transition processing in this embodiment will be described below.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S816 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. Note that, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 62 executes the waiting time setting process in step S809A instead of the process in step S809.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the waiting time setting process.
In the waiting time setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501 to S1505 as shown in FIG.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that the win/loss result is the "special losing result", in step S1502, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 stores the waiting time for opening (waiting period ) to set the short-term standby time. The value of this short-term standby time is random between "1000" and "10000".
The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 sec to 20 sec.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the success/failure result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the success/failure result is the "big hit", in step S1503, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1503 that the result of distribution is the result of a small number of rounds and high accuracy, in step S1504, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 stores a waiting time for opening (waiting time period) to set the medium-term standby time. The value of this medium-term waiting time is random between "5000" and "20000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 10 sec to 40 sec.

In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1503 that the distribution result is not a high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is a "low probability result" or a "best result", step In S1505, a long standby time is set as an opening standby time (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. The value of this long standby time is from "20000" to "50000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 40 sec to 100 sec.

In this embodiment, when the MPU 62 determines that the sorting result is the "low probability result" or the "best result", in step S1505, timer counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 The same long-term waiting time was set to T as the waiting time (waiting period) for the opening.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set different waiting times depending on whether the sorting result is determined to be the "best result" or the sorting result is the "low probability result". Well, for example, when it is determined that the sorting result is the "best result", a longer waiting time may be set than when it is determined that the sorting result is the "low probability result".

Further, in the present embodiment, the range of the short-term standby time and the range of the medium-term standby time overlap in the section of 10 sec to 20 sec, and the range of the medium-term standby time and the range of the long-term standby time do not overlap. All ranges may or may not overlap.
Further, in the present embodiment, the short-term standby time, medium-term standby time, and long-term standby time are set randomly within a predetermined range, but they may be fixed at predetermined values.

<About the flow when the reach display occurs>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning thru gate when the ready-to-win display occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 33A is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 33(B) is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the pattern display device 47 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 33(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable prize-winning through gate 50A (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 33(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped). FIG. 33(E) is a timing chart showing presence or absence of waiting time for opening.

In the case of generating the ready-to-win display, the MPU 102 reduces each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them in the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and on the right side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Let the angel on the left fight with the devil on the left. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the winning lottery depending on whether the angel wins this contest (see FIG. 25(A)).
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed" on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, so that you can hit right-handed. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

Thereafter, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 33A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the performance continuation time, as shown in FIG. 33(B), the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. (timing T2). When the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813.

However, even if the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812, it does not execute the big winning opening opening process in step S904 until the waiting time for the opening elapses. As shown in FIG. 33(D), the stop of opening/closing is continued, and as shown in FIG. 33(E), when the waiting time for opening has passed, opening/closing is in progress (timing T4).

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when executing the big winning opening opening process in step S904 for the first time after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

If it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has been received before the effect duration time elapses after the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 executes effect end processing in step S1311. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307. In other words, the MPU 92 terminates the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 .
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the ready-to-win display before the effect continuation time elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." It is suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by pressing, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Here, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize them. Therefore, when the ready-to-win display occurs, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the big win has been won. By daringly confirming the display section 45, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player as to whether or not it is confirmed whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the reach display by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Although it is suggested to the player that it can be done, other methods may be used to suggest to the player that the player can hit right and skip the reach indication. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements light-emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning thru-gate 50, and emits light from the light-emitting means so that the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right. You may suggest to the player.

In other words, the MPU 92 continues the ready-to-win display until the waiting time for opening elapses even when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A.
As described above, in the waiting time setting process, the MPU 62 sets a short-term waiting time of 2 sec to 20 sec as the waiting time for the opening when the game result is the "special loss result", and the game result is " If the game result is "few rounds high probability result", a medium waiting time of 10 sec to 40 sec is set as the waiting time for the opening, and if the game result is "best result" or "low probability result" , a long waiting time of 40 sec to 100 sec is set as the waiting time for the opening.

Therefore, when a ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50A and the game result is a "special loss result", the MPU 92 terminates the ready-to-win display after 2 to 20 seconds, and displays the pattern. The variable display of device 47 will cease. Further, when a ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50A and the game result is "few rounds with high probability", the MPU 92 terminates the ready-to-win display after 10 to 40 seconds. The variable display of the symbol display device 47 is stopped. Further, the MPU 92 displays a ready-to-win state after 40 to 100 seconds have elapsed when a ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50A and the game result is the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result". , and the variable display of the symbol display device 47 is stopped.

According to this, by allowing the ball to enter the variable prize-winning through gate 50A, the longer the time from the occurrence of the ready-to-win display to the end of the ready-to-win display, the more advantageous the result. When the time until completion of the ready-to-win display exceeds 40 sec, it is possible to recognize that the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result". After the variable display is started at 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player can expect that the game result will be the "best result" or the "low probability result". .

In this embodiment, the MPU 92 terminates the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 after the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A and the waiting time for the opening elapses. was
On the other hand, the MPU 92 terminates the ready-to-win display when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A after the waiting time for the opening has passed, and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47. can be

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "best result", it selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the game result is the "best result" or the "low-probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and ends the ready-to-win display by causing the angel to win. Then, the player is notified that the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result" (see FIG. 25(B)).
Thereafter, the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect C or effect D) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (see FIG. 25(C)).

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "special loss result", it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Then, when the game result is a “special loss result”, the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and causes the devil to win, thereby ending the ready-to-win display and making the game result a “special result”. The player is notified that it was a result of failure (see FIG. 25(D)).
After that, the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect A) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (see FIG. 25(E)).

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1312 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and displays the devil when the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", as in the case when the game result is the "special failure result". Win (see FIG. 27(A)).

Next, the MPU 102 restarts the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 27(B)).
Thereafter, the MPU 102 terminates the ready-to-win display and notifies the player that the game result is a "few rounds high probability result" by finally stopping and displaying the combination of special symbols. Based on the transmitted opening/closing execution mode command, the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect B) is executed by the pattern display device 47 (see FIG. 27(C)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state transition processing and the big winning opening opening/closing processing function as a specific winning ball setting unit that sets the variable winning thru gate 50A to be valid or invalid. Specifically, in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, the variable winning thru gate 50A is disabled until the waiting time for the opening has passed, and after the waiting time for the opening has passed, the variable winning gate 50A is disabled. The winning through gate 50A is set to be valid. In the effect determination process, the variable winning thru-gate 50A is set to valid in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, and the ready-to-win display ends when a ball enters the variable winning thru-gate 50A. I am letting
In the present embodiment, the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process set the variable winning thru gate 50A to be valid or invalid by adjusting the waiting time for the opening. It may be set to enabled or disabled based on other conditions. In short, the specific ball entry setting unit may set the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid.

Further, in the present embodiment, the standby time setting process is such that after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the variable winning through gate 50A is opened in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process. It functions as an invalid period setting unit that sets an invalid period to be invalid. Then, the waiting time setting process is based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 as a trigger, and when the result of the internal lottery is advantageous to the player. sets a longer invalid period than the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Specifically, the waiting time setting process is based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37, and the game result is a "special loss result". If there is, the invalid period is set to be longer in the order of the game result of "few rounds with high probability" and the game result of "most advantageous result" or "low probability result".

In the present embodiment, the waiting time setting process is performed by setting a short waiting time, a medium waiting time, and a long waiting time as waiting times (waiting periods) for opening timer counters T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. By setting either one, an invalid period for invalidating the variable winning through gate 50A is set.
On the other hand, for example, the waiting time setting process is an internal lottery advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. In the case of the result of (2), the variable winning through gate 50A is set to be invalid by using a conditional expression or the like that sets the invalid period longer than the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. An invalid period may be set.

In short, if the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player is determined based on the result of the internal lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the invalid period setting unit The invalid period may be set longer than in the case of a disadvantageous internal lottery result.
In the present embodiment, the invalid period setting unit, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, if the result of the internal lottery is advantageous to the player, set the invalid period longer than in the case of the result of internal lottery, which is disadvantageous for the player, but it may be set to the opposite relationship, and the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. It may be set regardless of the result of the internal lottery executed with the ball as a trigger.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as (1) to (9) in the first embodiment, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(1) In the effect determination process, the variable winning through gate 50A is enabled in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, and the ready-to-win display is displayed when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. Since it can be ended, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the ready-to-win display. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(2) In the waiting time setting process, in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous to the player, the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, so the ready-to-win display is terminated. The player's expectation can be heightened as the timing of the activation is delayed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(3) Since the variable winning thru-gate 50A is arranged on the left-handed route, the player can pass the game ball along the same route as when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. A game ball can be entered into the variable winning through gate 50A by firing. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect determination process is performed by shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 60, and then using the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50A as a trigger for the variable winning. It also functions as an opening/closing times notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening/closing times of the device 38 . Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by selecting effects A to D as effects for the opening/closing execution mode.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, the variable winning thru gate 50A allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters the game, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 It functions as a notification entry means for notifying users of useful information. In the effect determination process, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. It functions as a payout information reporting unit.

According to this, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A as a trigger. The player can check the information on the payout of the game ball by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50A. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this case, the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process function as a notification ball setting section that sets the variable winning through gate 50A to be valid or invalid. Specifically, in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, the variable winning thru gate 50A is disabled until the waiting time for the opening has passed, and after the waiting time for the opening has passed, the variable winning gate 50A is disabled. The winning through gate 50A is set to be valid. In the effect determination process, the variable winning thru gate 50A is set to be valid in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, and game balls are paid out when a ball enters the variable winning thru gate 50A. to notify the player of information about
In the present embodiment, the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process set the variable winning thru gate 50A to be valid or invalid by adjusting the waiting time for the opening. It may be set to enabled or disabled based on other conditions. In short, the informing ball setting section may set the informing ball entering means to be valid or invalid.

According to this, in the effect determination process, the variable winning through gate 50A is enabled in the game state transition process and the big winning opening opening/closing process, and the game is started when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50A. Since the player can be notified of the information on the payout of the game balls, the timing of notifying the player of the information on the payout of the game balls can be diversified. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, the waiting time setting process shifts the game state to an open/close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, thereby giving the player a higher value than the small win result. In this case, the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the small hit result that shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out, so that the player is notified of the information on the payout of the game balls. The later the timing, the higher the player's expectation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, game round control processing, game state transition processing, and effect pattern determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the game state transition processing in this embodiment will be described below.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes the process of step S509 after executing the process of step S508.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1307 of the effect determination process. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1606 as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the effect continuation time. In this effect duration setting process, the MPU 92 sets the same effect duration time as the display duration time included in the variation command.

In step S1602, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate reach display.
Specifically, the MPU 92, based on the content of the command for variation, determines if the game result is a "most advantageous result", a "low probability result", a "few rounds high probability result", or a "special unsuccessful result". It is determined to generate the ready-to-win display, and when the game result is "out of normal result", it is determined not to generate the ready-to-win display.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 not to generate the ready-to-win display, it ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S1604.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 to generate the reach display, in step S1603, the MPU 92 executes a reach display setting process. In this ready-to-win display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets a ready-to-win display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1601.

In step S1604, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a promotion effect. More specifically, the MPU 92 generates a promotion effect when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L in step S1303. In other cases, it is determined that the promotion effect is not generated.
In this embodiment, it is determined that a promotion effect is to be generated when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L in step S1303. However, it does not necessarily have to be generated. For example, it may be determined whether or not to generate the promotion effect by lottery based on a predetermined probability.

Here, in the promotion effect, it is determined in step S1303 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", and a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L is executed. When such information is determined, it is an effect for replacing this information with information related to a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers.
It should be noted that the promotion effect, when it is determined in step S1303 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", and in step S1303 it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result". occurs even if

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the promotion effect is not to be generated, it ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S1605.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the promotion effect is to be generated, in step S1605, the MPU 92 executes setting processing of the promotion effect.

In the promotion effect setting process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to replace the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same even number with the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same odd number. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines in step S1303 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", and the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L is determined. When the information related to is determined, it is decided to replace the information related to the combination of symbols having the same even number with a probability of 50% with the information related to the combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the remaining 50% It is decided not to replace the information related to the combination of symbols having the same even number with the information related to the combination of symbols having the same odd number with a probability of .
Further, in the promotion effect setting process, the MPU 92 selects one of the promotion effects stored in the ROM 93 .

In step S1606, the MPU 92 executes extension processing of the effect duration time. In this effect duration extension process, the MPU 92 extends the effect duration time set in step S1601. Specifically, the MPU 92 resets the effect duration to the total time of the effect duration set in step S1601 and the promotion effect duration set in the promotion effect setting process of step S1605. .
Here, the duration of the promotion effect is slightly shorter than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 (for example, 90 sec).

In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time as the duration of the promotion effect than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 described above. The same time as the waiting time of (1) may be set as the duration of the promotion performance, or a time longer than the waiting time for the round game may be set as the duration of the promotion performance.

<About the flow when promotion production occurs>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the variable prize-winning through-gate at the time of occurrence of the promotion effect. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate when promotion effects occur.
Specifically, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the ready-to-win display. FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the promotion effect is generated. 36(C) and (D) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. FIG.

FIG. 36(C) shows that when information related to a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, this information is displayed with the same odd-numbered number. is a diagram showing a display screen G when replaced with information related to a combination of symbols having . FIG. 36(D) shows that, when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L is determined, this information is displayed as the same odd number. is a diagram showing a display screen G when not replaced with information related to a combination of symbols having .

FIG. 37A is a timing chart showing the variable display state (during variable display or stopped) of the main display section 45 and the pattern display device 47. FIG. FIG. 37(B) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the promotion effect (during execution or execution stop). FIG. 37(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 37(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the promotion effect is generated, the MPU 102 terminates the ready-to-win display as shown in FIG. 36(A).
Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped as shown in FIG. 37(A). (Timing T1).
Further, the MPU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

After finishing the ready-to-win display, as shown in FIGS. 36(B) and 37(B), each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is enlarged and arranged at the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, By restarting the variable display of the pattern display device 47, promotion performance is executed. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the promotion effect has been generated by displaying the line of the angel "Re-lottery!!" present below the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. The duration of this promotion effect is the duration of the promotion effect set in the process of setting the promotion effect in step S1605, that is, the time from timing T1 to timing T5 (see two-dot chain line in FIG. 37B). there is
In addition, when executing the promotion effect, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, so that you can hit right. To suggest to a player that promotion performance can be skipped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812, as shown in FIG.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when executing the big winning opening opening process of step S904 for the first time after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

Here, when it is determined that the opening command is received in step S1309 before the duration of the promotion effect elapses after the promotion effect occurs, the MPU 92 executes the effect end processing in step S1311. . In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the promotion effect.
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the promotion effect before the continuation time of the promotion effect elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Although it is suggested to the player that the promotion effect can be skipped by pressing, it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the promotion effect can be skipped by hitting to the right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the promotion effect by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" which is present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Although it is suggested to the player that it can be done, other methods may be used to suggest to the player that the promotion effect can be skipped by hitting to the right. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements light emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning thru gate 50, and emits light from the light emitting means so that the promotion effect can be skipped by hitting right. You may suggest to the player.

When the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, the MPU 92 converts this information to a combination of symbols having the same odd number. When the information is replaced with such information, the effect C is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36(C), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect C) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number at the lower left of the display screen G as a stop result.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, the MPU 92 transfers this information to symbols having the same odd number. If the information related to the combination is not replaced, the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36(D), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect D) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number at the lower left of the display screen G as a stop result.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning thru-gate when the promotion effect occurs. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the flow when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate when the promotion effect occurs.
Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing the display screen G at the end of the ready-to-win display. FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the promotion effect is generated. 38(C) and (D) are diagrams showing the display screen G when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50. FIG.

FIG. 38(C) shows that when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, this information is displayed with the same odd-numbered number. is a diagram showing a display screen G when replaced with information related to a combination of symbols having . FIG. 38(D) shows that, when information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, this information is displayed with the same odd-numbered number. is a diagram showing a display screen G when not replaced with information related to a combination of symbols having .

FIG. 39A is a timing chart showing the variable display state (during variable display or stopped) of the main display section 45 and the pattern display device 47. FIG. FIG. 39(B) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the promotion effect (during execution or execution stop). FIG. 39(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable prize-winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 39(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the promotion effect is generated, the MPU 102 terminates the ready-to-win display as shown in FIG. 38(A).
Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the display continuation time has passed in step S506, the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped as shown in FIG. (Timing T1).
Further, the MPU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47 based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

After finishing the ready-to-win display, as shown in FIGS. 38(B) and 39(B), each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is enlarged and arranged at the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, By restarting the variable display of the pattern display device 47, promotion performance is executed. In addition, the MPU 102 notifies the player of the occurrence of the promotion performance by displaying the line of the angel "Re-lottery!!" present below the display screen G of the pattern display device 47.例文帳に追加The duration of this promotion effect is the duration of the promotion effect set in the process of setting the promotion effect in step S1605, that is, the time from timing T1 to timing T5.
In addition, when executing the promotion effect, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" present on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, so that the player can hit right. To suggest to a player that promotion performance can be skipped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39(C), the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" in step S812 without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, as shown in FIG. 39(D), the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813 is executed (timing T3).

Here, after the promotion effect occurs, if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50, after the effect selected in the effect pattern determination process of step S1307 is completed, that is, after the promotion effect , the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813.
In this embodiment, the standby time for the round game is set to 100 seconds, so if the duration of the promotion effect is set to 90 seconds, the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 after 10 seconds have elapsed after the promotion effect is finished. will be executed.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when executing the big winning opening opening process of step S904 for the first time after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

When the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, the MPU 92 converts this information to a combination of symbols having the same odd number. When the information is replaced with such information, the effect C is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 38(C), the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number on the effective line L of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as a stop result, and the display screen The player is notified of the success of the promotion presentation by displaying the angel's words "You did it!" present below G.
After that, the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect C) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (see FIG. 36(C)). At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd number at the lower left of the display screen G as a stop result.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L, the MPU 92 transfers this information to symbols having the same odd number. If the information related to the combination is not replaced, the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 38(D), the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same even number on the active line L of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as a stop result. The player is notified of the failure of the promotion performance by displaying the angel's line "Unfortunate" existing below G.例文帳に追加
After that, the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect D) on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 (see FIG. 36(D)). At this time, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number at the lower left of the display screen G as a stop result.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 is a low-probability result (disadvantageous Side internal lottery result) and the transition to a game state that is more advantageous for the player than the disadvantageous game state that is shifted with a low probability result, and a re-advantageous result (advantageous side internal lottery results).
In addition, the production pattern determination processing is promoted to release the camouflage as an expected production that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and to notify the player of the re-advantageous result. It functions as a promotion effect executing section that executes the effect on the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁
Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the promotion effect is used as the expected effect, but other expected effect such as an effect of notifying the number of round games may be used. In short, the expected performance should be a performance that makes the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as (9) and (10) in the first embodiment, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 release the camouflage as an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and announces that the result is again advantageous. Since there is provided the effect pattern determination process for executing the promotion effect to be notified to the player by the symbol display device 47, the player can keep the game state by the main controller 60 until the game in the open/close execution mode is started. Even after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the promotion performance can be seen, and the game can be played while enjoying.
(2) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 release the camouflage as an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and indicate that the result is again advantageous. A performance pattern determination process for executing a promotion performance to be notified to the player by the pattern display device 47 is provided, so that the player can execute the promotion performance by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加It can be terminated and the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may include a specific ball entry setting unit that sets the variable winning thru gate 50 to be valid or invalid. It is also possible to set the variable winning thru gate 50 to be effective in the ball entering setting unit, and to terminate the promotion effect when the ball enters the variable winning thru gate 50 as a trigger.

According to this, the effect determination process includes validating the variable prize-winning through gate 50 in the specific ball entry setting unit, and ending the promotion effect with the ball entering the variable prize-winning through gate 50 as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the promotion effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Also, in this case, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 cause the game state to shift to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the variable winning through gate 50 is opened by the specific ball entry setting section. may be provided with an invalid period setting unit that sets an invalid period to invalidate, the invalid period setting unit is an internal executed triggered by the entry of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 Based on the result of the lottery, the internal lottery result that is advantageous to the player (e.g., re-advantageous result) is compared to the internal lottery result that is unfavorable to the player (e.g., low-probability result). It may be configured to set a long invalid period.

According to this, in the case of the result of the internal lottery advantageous to the player, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer than in the case of the result of the internal lottery disadvantageous to the player. The later the timing of ending , the more the player's expectation can be heightened. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 40 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the variable winning through gate 50 provided on the right side of the central portion.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 has, as shown in FIG. 40, a variable winning through gate 50 and a round number reporting through gate 51 provided on the left side of the central portion. is different from the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10, in the low-probability mode, has a left-handed route (first route) that tends to cause game balls to enter the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, and the upper working port 36 and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 than the left-handed route, and the round number reporting through gate 51 is arranged on the left-handed route. is set.

The round number notification through gate 51 includes a detection sensor 40h (see FIG. 41) for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the number-of-rounds notification through gate 51, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 41, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply.
The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40h. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. 45 and the character object display unit 46 .

The detection sensors 40a to 40h are for the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, various winning ports of the variable winning device 38, the out port 39, the variable winning through gate 50, and the number of rounds. The through gates 51 and the through gates 41 are provided in one-to-one correspondence. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40h, the MPU 62 determines the winning of various prizes, the exit 39, the variable prize through gate 50, the round number notification through gate 51, and each through gate 41. (Entering the ball judgment) is performed. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 42, the values of random numbers related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type are stored in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 41) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 42(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 42(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display unit reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 42(a), includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", And a plurality of distribution results of "most advantageous result at low probability (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are assigned as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 19” are distributed to “low round high Probability result”, and “20 to 29” are assigned to “Most advantageous result at low probability”.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 42(b), includes "low-probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "fourth-round best-advantage result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)". , "8th round most advantageous result (high probability special distribution result)", and "16 round most advantageous result (high probability special distribution result)". Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 19” are distributed to “4 rounds maximum ``20 to 24'' are assigned to ``Most favorable result in 8 rounds'', and ``25 to 29'' are allocated to ``Most favorable result in 16 rounds''.

In the following explanation, "Most favorable result at low probability", "Most favorable result for 4 rounds", "Most favorable result for 8 rounds", and "Most favorable result for 16 rounds" are also expressed simply as "Most favorable result". do. In addition, "4th round most favorable result", "8th round most favorable result", and "16th round most favorable result" are particularly expressed as "round distribution most favorable result".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a sorting result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
The "few-round high-probability result" and "best-favorable result" are sorting results in which the win-fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "few-round high-probability result" and the "best result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game state transition process, the big winning opening opening process, and the effect determination process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the game state transition processing, the big winning opening opening processing, and the effect determination processing in this embodiment will be described.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the through winning process of step S104, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40h corresponding to the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds has detected the winning of the game ball, A round number notification execution flag is set in the RAM 64 . This round number notification execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the round number notification through gate 51 .

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S816 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not the high-probability result for the few rounds, that is, the distribution result is the "low-probability result" or the "highest-probability result". result", the process from step S817C onwards is executed, and the process of step S811C is executed instead of the process of step S811, which is different from the first embodiment.

In step S817C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "round distribution most advantageous result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "round distribution most favorable result", in step S818C, the MPU 62 executes a round number setting process.
In this round number setting process, the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to a value corresponding to the number of rounds of the "best result".

Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "fourth round most advantageous result", the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "4". set. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is the "8th round most advantageous result", it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "8". Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the result of distribution is the "16 round most advantageous result", it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "16". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S817C that the distribution result is not the "round distribution most favorable result", that is, the distribution result is a "low probability result" or a "low probability most favorable result". If so, the round counter RC is set to "15" in step S808.

After executing any one of steps S805, S807, S818C, and S808, the MPU 62 executes steps S809 and subsequent steps, as in the first embodiment.

In step S811C, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag and the round number notification execution flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. In other words, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flag and the round number notification execution flag set in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.
Also, in step S811C, the MPU 62 sets an opening execution flag in the RAM 64. FIG. This opening execution flag is a flag for specifying that the opening/closing execution mode has been entered and a round game can be started with the entry of a ball into the variable prize-winning through gate 50 as a trigger.
After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.

<Grand Prize Opening Processing>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1010 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, after executing step S1003, or when it is determined in step S1001 that the opening execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 performs the process of step S1004. is different from the first embodiment in that the processes after step S1011C are executed before execution of .

In step S1011C, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the round number notification execution flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1011C that the round number notification execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes the processing from step S1004.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the round number notification execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1011C, it sets the round number notification command in step S1012C. This number-of-rounds notification command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the round number notification command set in step S1012C to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. In other words, the MPU 62 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, starts a round game when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50, and then counts the number of rounds when a ball enters the round number reporting through gate 51. Set the notification command.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the number-of-rounds notification command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

After step S1012C is executed, or if it is determined in step S1011C that the round number notification execution flag is not set in the RAM 64, the processing after step S1004 is executed.

<Production decision processing>
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1315 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the MPU 62 executes steps S1303C and S1313C instead of steps S1303 and S1313, and after executing the processing of step S1314, executes the processing of step S1315. It is different from the first embodiment in that the processing of steps S1316C to S1319C is executed before the processing.

In step S1303C, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low-probability most advantageous result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same is determined, and if it is determined that the game result is a "low-probability result", the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L is determined, and if the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result for round distribution", the same stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L will be the same. Information is determined for symbol combinations with odd numbers. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In step S1313C, the MPU 92 executes processing for determining the opening/closing execution mode effect corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1312. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when determining that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “few rounds high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result at low probability", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “most advantageous result of round allocation”, the MPU 92 selects the effect E as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. In addition, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode. As for the duration of the effect E, when it is determined in step S1312 that the game result is "four rounds with the most advantageous result", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed four times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode. When it is determined in step S1312 that the game result is "most advantageous result in 8 rounds", the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 8 times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode. If it is determined in step S1312 that the game result is "most advantageous result in 16 rounds", the large winning opening 38a is opened and closed 16 times in a long time mode in the open/close execution mode. corresponds to the time of

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1203 based on the selection result of the effects A to E.

In step S1314, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S1313. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S1314, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S1316C onward.

In step S1316C, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a round number notification command has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1316C that the round number notification command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1315.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1316C that the round number notification command has been received, in step S1317C, the MPU 92 determines the type of game result based on the contents of the round number notification command.

In step S1318C, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for informing the number of rounds corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1317C. In the process of determining the number-of-rounds notification effect, the MPU 92 selects the 4-rounds notification effect as the effect for notifying the number of rounds when it is determined that the game result is the "fourth-round most advantageous result" in step S1317C. . Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "8th round most advantageous result", it selects the 8th round notification effect as the effect for informing the number of rounds. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "16th round most advantageous result", it selects the 16th round notification effect as the effect for informing the number of rounds.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1203 based on the selection result of the 4 rounds notification effect, the 8th rounds notification effect, or the 16th rounds notification effect. The voice control of the part 24 is executed.

In step S1319C, the MPU 92 sets a command for informing the number of rounds including information related to the effect for informing the number of rounds selected in step S1318C. Then, the MPU 92 stores the round number notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This command for notifying the number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the round number notification effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the round number notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for notifying the number of rounds selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the processing of step S1319C, or when determining that the round number notification command has not been received in step S1316C, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S1315 onward.
In step S1315, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 46, the pachinko machine 10, as game results excluding the "ordinary loss result", "jackpot win" and "special loss result" results, "small round high probability result", "low probability result" It has distribution results of "best result", "low probability result", and "round distribution best result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 46, the "special losing result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the lottery (symbol x in the figure). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift. In addition, in the "special failure result", the stop result is a combination of ready-to-win display symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. In addition, the support mode does not shift in the "special outlier result".

In the "few round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of times being two, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. . In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "few-round high-probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "small round high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode.
Therefore, the player can grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "few rounds high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result at low probability" and "low probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is continued for a long time. manner is executed 15 times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result at low probability", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, opening and closing The effect for the run mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If so, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Become. In addition, the support mode transitions to the high-frequency support mode for "Most Favorable Result at Low Probability" and "Low Probability Result".

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the open/close execution mode is effect C, the game result is "most advantageous result at low probability". It can be understood that However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, so that the game result is "maximum when low probability". It is not possible to grasp whether it is a "favorable result" or a "low probability result".

Then, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the pattern display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display on the display screen G an image that clearly indicates that the high probability mode is selected, and the high frequency support mode is set such that the number of game rounds is the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) is reached, an image is displayed on the display screen G to notify that the mode will be shifted to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result at low probability", the symbol display device 47 will make the final effect for the opening/closing execution mode in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. If the effect is D, the game result is camouflaged as if it were a "low-probability result".

Then, when the sorting result is "most advantageous result at low probability", the pattern display device 47 does not become "big hit winning" in the winning lottery, and has a high probability after 100 game rounds are completed. An image indicating the mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

In the "round distribution most advantageous result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 4 times, 8 times, or 16 times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is long. It is run 4, 8, or 16 times in time fashion. Specifically, in the "four rounds most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with four times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed for a long period of time. It is executed 4 times.
In addition, in the "eight rounds most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with eight times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning port 38a is executed eight times in a long time mode. be done. Then, in the "16 rounds most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 16 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning port 38a is executed 16 times in a long time mode. be done.

Here, in the "round allocation most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the success/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode effect is , production E.
Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect E, the game result is "round distribution most advantageous result". It can be understood that

<Flow of open/close execution mode>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the through gate for informing the number of rounds during execution of the opening/closing execution mode effect. Specifically, FIG. 47A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the effect E for the opening/closing execution mode is generated. FIG. 47(B) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is not "4 rounds most advantageous result".
FIG. 47(C) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is "best result in 4 rounds". FIG. 47(D) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is "most advantageous result in 16 rounds". FIG. 47(E) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is "best result in 8 rounds".

The MPU 92 selects the effect E as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode when it is determined that the game result is the "round allocation most advantageous result" in the process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S1313C. Then, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect E for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47A, the MPU 102 displays the characters "ROUND" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and displays the number "1" indicating the number of rounds on the right side. do. This number "1" informs the player that the first round game is being played. Also, for the number of rounds, 1 is added to the previous value each time the big winning opening opening process of step S904 is executed. The maximum value of the number of rounds is "4" when the game result is "most favorable result in 4 rounds", "8" when the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds", and "8" when the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds". It is "16" in the case of "16 round most advantageous result".

In addition, the MPU 102 displays the line of the devil existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, "You will know the number of rounds when you pass through the gate on the left side of the screen." It is suggested to the player that the number of rounds should be notified with the entry of the ball as a trigger.

If the game result is not "most advantageous result in 4 rounds" (if the game result is "most advantageous result in 8 rounds" or "most advantageous result in 16 rounds"), as shown in FIG. , repeating the execution of the big winning opening opening process in step S904, and displaying the angel's words "still more!!" existing in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 at the start of execution of the fifth round game. , the player is notified that the game result was not the "fourth round most advantageous result".
On the other hand, if the game result is "most advantageous result in 4th round", as shown in FIG. At the end of the execution of , by displaying the angel's line "See you later!" existing in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, the player is notified that the game result was "the most advantageous result in 4 rounds". to be notified.

After that, when the game result is "Most advantageous result of 16 rounds", as shown in FIG. At this time, the player is informed that the game result was "best result in 16 rounds" by displaying the angel's words "You did it!" present in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47.例文帳に追加.
On the other hand, if the game result is "best result in 8th round", as shown in FIG. At the end of the execution of , by displaying the angel's words "See you later!" existing in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, the player is notified that the game result was "best result in 8 rounds". to be notified.

FIG. 48 is a view showing the display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the through gate for informing the number of rounds during execution of the effect for the open/close execution mode. Specifically, FIG. 48A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the effect E for the opening/closing execution mode is generated. FIG. 48(B) is a view showing the display screen G when a ball enters the through gate 51 for notifying the number of rounds.
FIG. 47(C) is a view showing the display screen G when the game result is "best result in 8 rounds".

The MPU 92 selects the effect E as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode when it is determined that the game result is the "round allocation most advantageous result" in the process for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in step S1313C. Then, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect E for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47A, the MPU 102 displays the characters "ROUND" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and displays the number "1" indicating the number of rounds on the right side. do. This number "1" informs the player that the first round game is being played. Also, for the number of rounds, 1 is added to the previous value each time the big winning opening opening process of step S904 is executed. The maximum value of the number of rounds is "4" when the game result is "most favorable result in 4 rounds", "8" when the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds", and "8" when the game result is "most favorable result in 8 rounds". It is "16" in the case of "16 round most advantageous result".

In addition, the MPU 102 displays the line of the devil existing in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, "You will know the number of rounds when you pass through the gate on the left side of the screen." It suggests to the player that the number of rounds should be notified when the ball is entered.

When a ball enters the round number notification through gate 51 during execution of the round game, the MPU 62 sets the round number notification command in step S1012C, and in step S301 of the normal process, in step S1012C. The set number of rounds notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Then, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1316C that the round number notification command has been received, in step S1318C, determination processing of the round number notification effect corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1317C is performed. to run. In the process of determining the number-of-rounds notification effect, the MPU 92 selects the 4-rounds notification effect as the effect for notifying the number of rounds when it is determined that the game result is the "fourth-round most advantageous result" in step S1317C. . Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "8th round most advantageous result", it selects the 8th round notification effect as the effect for informing the number of rounds. Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1317C that the game result is the "16th round most advantageous result", it selects the 16th round notification effect as the effect for informing the number of rounds.
In the following, a case where the game result is "most advantageous result of 16 rounds" (a case where the 16 round notification effect is selected as the effect for informing the number of rounds) will be described as an example.

When a ball enters the round number notification through gate 51 during execution of the round game, the MPU 102 executes the round number notification effect selected in the round number notification effect determination process of step S1318C. do. Specifically, when the 16th round notification effect is selected as the effect for notifying the number of rounds, the MPU 102 is present at the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 48(B). The player is informed that the game result is "16th round most advantageous result" by displaying the line "16R fixed!!" of the devil who is present.
In addition, when the 4th round notification effect is selected as the effect for informing the number of rounds, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "4R confirmed" present at the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and the round is displayed. When the 8 rounds notification effect is selected as the effect for notifying the number, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "8R confirmed!"

After that, when the game result is "Most advantageous result in 16 rounds", as shown in FIG. At this time, the player is notified that the game is the last round by displaying the angel's line "See you later!" in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number-of-rounds notification through gate 51 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 notify the player. It functions as a notification entry means for notifying useful information for.
In addition, in the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the main controller 60, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. It functions as a payout information reporting unit.

Here, the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 is performed by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable prize winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times, thereby obtaining a predetermined number of game balls. by setting the first internal lottery result (e.g., the most advantageous result of 4 rounds) that shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode that can pay out , and setting the number of opening/closing times of the variable winning device 38 to a number greater than a predetermined number of times, A second internal lottery result (for example, a , 8 Round Best Outcome and 16 Round Best Outcome).

In the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60, the number of times of opening/closing of the variable winning device 38 is notified to the player when the ball enters the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. By notifying, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of game balls.

According to this embodiment, the same actions and effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the game ball enters the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. Since an effect determination process is provided for informing the player of the information on the payout, the player can confirm the information on the payout of the game ball by letting the game ball enter the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(2) In the effect determination process, after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60, the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened/closed is determined by the player when the ball enters the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. , the player is notified of the information on the payout of the game ball, so the player confirms the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by entering the game ball into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. can do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(3) Since the through-gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route, the player can follow the same path as when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. A game ball can enter the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route, but may be arranged on the right-handed route.
However, in this embodiment, since the variable winning device 38 is arranged in the right-handed route, when the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is arranged in the right-handed route, the variable winning device 38 When the game ball is entered, the game ball is also entered into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds, and entry into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is avoided during the execution of the performance for the open/close execution mode. be unable to do so. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable that the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds is arranged on the left-handed route.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may include a notification ball setting unit that enables or disables the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. By setting the number-of-rounds notification thru-gate 51 to valid in the notification-entering ball setting unit, and when the ball enters the number-of-rounds notification through gate 51, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball. may be configured.

According to this, the effect determination process is performed by setting the round number notification through gate 51 to valid by the notification entering ball setting unit, and paying out the game ball when the ball enters the round number notification through gate 51. Since it is possible to notify the player of the information regarding the payout of the game balls, it is possible to diversify the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game balls. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in this case, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 cause the main control device 60 to shift the game state to the open/close execution mode, and then the through gate for informing the number of rounds in the informing ball setting section. An invalid period setting part for setting an invalid period for setting 51 to invalid may be provided, and the invalid period setting part shifts the game state to an open/close execution mode capable of putting out more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls. In the case of a second internal lottery result giving the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result, the game state is shifted to an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out. The invalid period may be set longer than in the case of the internal lottery result.

According to this, the invalid period setting section shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, thereby giving the player a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery. In the case of the second internal lottery result given to , the invalid period is set longer than in the case of the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. The later the timing of informing the player of the information on the payout of the game balls, the higher the player's sense of expectation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game ball. It functioned only as a notification entry means to notify the information. On the other hand, the round number notification through gate 51 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and starts the game (round game) in the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) when the game ball enters. You may make it function as a specific ball entry means.

According to such a configuration, the player moves the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main controller 60 until the ready-to-win display is finished by entering the game ball into the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds. The ready-to-win display can be seen even after the game is played, and the game can be played while enjoying the game. In addition, the player can check the information regarding the payout of the game ball by letting the game ball enter the through gate 51 for informing the number of rounds.

In other words, when the player terminates the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the variable prize-winning through gate 50, the player enters the opening/closing execution mode without confirming the information regarding the payout of the game ball. You can enjoy playing games. In addition, when the player ends the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the round number notification through gate 51, the player can check the information regarding the payout of the game ball and open/close execution mode. You can enjoy the game of Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to select whether or not to check the information regarding the payout of the game balls when starting the game in the open/close execution mode, and allows the player to play the game comfortably. .

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 execute different processes from those in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, timer interrupt processing, game state transition processing, and effect determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. Contents of timer interrupt processing, game state transition processing, and effect determination processing according to the present embodiment will be described below.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101D to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101D, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40g, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Further, in step S101D, the MPU 62 sets an out-port entry flag in the RAM 64 when it is determined that the detection sensor 40e corresponding to the out-port 39 has detected the winning of the game ball. This out-port entry flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the out-port 39 .
After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S102, as in the first embodiment.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S820D as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S812D.

The processing (processing after step S802) when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress is the same as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, the processing (processing after step S812D) when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is in progress is different from that of the first embodiment. Processing after step S812D will be described below.

In step S812D, MPU62 determines whether the round game execution flag is set to RAM64.
MPU62 performs the process after step S817D, when it determines with the round game execution flag not being set to RAM64 in step S812D.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 at step S812D, it executes the processing from step S813 onward, as in the first embodiment.

In step S817D, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S817D that the value of the timer counter WT is not equal to or less than "0", in step S818D the out-going ball flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared. In other words, before the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game elapses, the out-entry ball flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S101D is cleared each time the game state transition processing is executed. Become.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S817D that the value of the timer counter WT is "0" or less, in step S819D it sets a gate extension command. The MPU 62 transmits the gate addition command set in step S819D to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the gate addition command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

In step S820D, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM 64 has an out-going ball flag set.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S820D that the flag for entering a ball is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S813 onward, as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S820D that the out-port entry flag is not set in the RAM 64, it ends the game state transition processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 determines that the out-port entry flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S820D of the game state transition processing, in step S813, the large winning port opening/closing processing is performed. Running. In other words, in the game state transition process, after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the MPU 62, when the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game has passed, the entry to the out port 39 is prohibited. It functions as a specific control starting section that starts a game in the opening/closing execution mode as a trigger.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the out port 39 allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and functions as another ball entry means different from the variable winning through gate 50 (specific ball entry means).

In the present embodiment, the game state transition process is triggered by entering a ball into the out port 39 after a predetermined time (waiting time for round game) has passed after the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode by the MPU 62. However, the game in the opening/closing execution mode may be started with the entry of a ball into the out port 39 before a predetermined time elapses.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the other ball entry means is only the out hole 39, but for example, the general winning hole 35, the upper operation hole 36, the lower operation hole 37, etc. may be other ball entry means. . In other words, the gaming machine may have a plurality of other ball-entering means. In this case, the specific control starting unit may vary the predetermined time for each ball-entering means.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process is triggered by entering a ball into the out port 39 after a predetermined time (waiting time for a round game) has passed after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the MPU 62. However, for example, the game in the opening and closing execution mode may be started when the waiting time (specific time) for the round game has passed, and another ball entry means , and the elapse of a specific time may be used together. At this time, if all the ball entry means provided in the game area are replaced with other ball entry means, the gaming machine can start a game in a specific control state triggered by the shooting of the game ball into the game area. .

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1315 as shown in FIG.

In step S1301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1316D.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1301 that each command has been received, in step S1302, based on the content of the type command, the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result". result”.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result", in step S1303, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S1304, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not it is “Few Rounds High Probability Result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", in step S1305, it executes common symbol determination processing. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects different numbers that will not be selected in the case of a "normal failure result" in the winning lottery, instead of a combination of symbols having the same number or a combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display. Determine the special symbol combination (eg, "3, 4, 1") that you have.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1304 that the game result is not the "few rounds high probability result", in step S1306, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for the losing result. In this outlier result symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command. Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "special failure result", it determines that the ready-to-win display occurs, and when it determines that the game result is a "normal failure result", It is determined that reach indication does not occur.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally displayed stop on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S1303, S1305, and S1306, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S1307D. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. Incidentally, in step S1307D, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1203 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1308, the MPU 92 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S1303, S1305 and S1306. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1308, or when determining in step S1301 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1316D and subsequent steps.
In step S1316D, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a gate addition command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1316D that the gate extension command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1309.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1316D that the gate addition command has been received, in step S1317D the MPU 92 sets the gate addition notification command. Then, the MPU 92 stores the gate addition notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This gate addition notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 the data table for executing the effect for the notification of the addition of gates on the pattern display device 47 based on the addition of gates notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 informs the player that the waiting time (waiting period) for the round game has elapsed and that the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started with the ball entering the out port 39 as a trigger. inform.

After executing the processing of step S1317D, or when determining that the gate addition command has not been received in step S1316D, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S1309 onward.
In step S1309, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1315.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that an opening command has been received, in step S1310 it determines whether the effect duration time selected in the effect pattern determination process in step S1307 has elapsed. determine whether or not

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1310 that the effect continuation time has not passed, in step S1311 the effect end process is executed. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307.
In step S1318D, the MPU 92 sets an effect end execution flag in the RAM 94. FIG. This effect end execution flag is a flag for specifying that a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the effect continuation time elapses and the effect end process of step S1311 is executed.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1310 that the effect continuation time has elapsed, it clears the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94 in step S1319D.

After executing the process of step S1318D or step S1319D, the MPU 92 determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command in step S1312.

In step S1313D, the MPU 92 executes processing for determining the opening/closing execution mode effect corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1312. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when determining that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “few rounds high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the effect CS or the effect DS is generated as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the effect CL or the effect DL is generated as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. to select. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DS as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. . Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DL as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. .

The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. Further, the duration of the effects CS, CL and the effects DS, DL correspond to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening and closing execution mode.
In the following description, the effect CS and the effect CL are also simply referred to as the effect C, and the effect DS and the effect DL are also simply referred to as the effect D.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1203 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S1314, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S1313. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1205 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S1314, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1309, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1315 and subsequent steps.
In step S1315, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process.
As described above, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1307D of the effect determination process. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1408D as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display.
Specifically, the MPU 92, based on the content of the command for variation, determines if the game result is a "most advantageous result", a "low probability result", a "few rounds high probability result", or a "special unsuccessful result". It is determined to generate the ready-to-win display, and when the game result is "out of normal result", it is determined not to generate the ready-to-win display.

When the MPU 92 determines to generate the ready-to-win display in step S1401, the MPU 92 executes the processing after step S1402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines not to generate the ready-to-win display in step S1401, it executes the processing from step S1404.

First, the processing (processing after step S1402) when the MPU 92 determines to generate the ready-to-win display in step S1401 will be described.
In step S1402, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the effect continuation time for ready-to-win generation. In the processing for setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation, the MPU 92 sets a time (for example, 90 sec) slightly shorter than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in step S810 as the effect duration. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the effect duration time by referring to the reach generation effect duration table stored in the reach table storage area 93 a of the ROM 93 . This ready-to-win effect continuation time table stores a plurality of ready-to-win indications and a plurality of effect continuation times respectively corresponding to the plurality of ready-to-win indications in association with each other.
Here, the duration of the ready-to-win display is the total time of the display duration included in the variation command and the presentation duration.

In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets a time slightly shorter than the wait time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 as the presentation duration time. The same time as the time may be set as the presentation continuation time, or a longer time than the standby time for the round game may be set as the presentation continuation time. Moreover, the MPU 92 may set the effect duration time so that the ready-to-win display is continued without ending. In this case, the ready-to-win display is performed by, for example, slowing down the image, repeating the image, or stopping the image and making the player hit the push button repeatedly to extend the effect of the ready-to-win display. may be configured.

After executing step S1402, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S1405D.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is set, in step S1406D, it executes normal ready-to-win display setting processing. In this normal reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the normal reach display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is not set, in step S1407D, it executes special ready-to-win display setting processing. In this special ready-to-win display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets a special ready-to-win display corresponding to the effect duration set in step S1402.

After executing the process of step S1406D or the process of step S1407D, the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1404) when the MPU 92 determines in step S1401 not to generate the ready-to-win display will be described.
In step S1404, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the non-reach effect duration time. In the process of setting the non-reach effect duration time, the MPU 92 sets the same effect duration time as the display duration time included in the variation command.

In step S1408D, the MPU 92 clears the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94.
After executing the process of step S1408D, the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process.

<About the flow when the reach display occurs>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when a ball enters the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the flow when a ball enters the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed.
Specifically, FIG. 53A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. FIG. 53(B) is a view showing the display screen G when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 53(C) is a view showing the display screen G after a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 53(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G in a state in which an effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.
Note that FIG. 53 shows the display screen G when the game result is the "best result", and the same applies when the game result is the "low probability result".

FIG. 54A is a timing chart showing the state of the variable display on the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 54(B) is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the pattern display device 47 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 54(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable prize-winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 54(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 53(A), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has passed, as shown in FIG.
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the performance continuation time, as shown in FIG. 54(B), the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812D, as shown in FIG.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when executing the big winning opening opening process in step S904 for the first time after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

If it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has been received before the effect continuation time elapses after the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 executes effect end processing in step S1311. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307D. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 54(B).
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the ready-to-win display before the effect continuation time elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." It is suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by pressing, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Here, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize them. Therefore, when the ready-to-win display occurs, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the big win has been won. By daringly confirming the display section 45, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player as to whether or not it is confirmed whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the reach display by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Although it is suggested to the player that it can be done, other methods may be used to suggest to the player that the player can hit right and skip the reach indication. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements light-emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning thru-gate 50, and emits light from the light-emitting means so that the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right. You may suggest to the player.

Here, if a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the effect continuation time elapses, that is, if the ready-to-win display is ended (skipped), the effect end execution flag is stored in the RAM 94 in step S1318D. is set, it means that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM94.
Therefore, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" in step S1312 and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the effect for opening/closing execution mode in step S1313D is determined. In the determination process, the effect CS or the effect DS is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DS as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. .

Then, when the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and displays the angels as shown in FIG. 53(B). By making the player win, the ready-to-win display is terminated and the player is notified that the game result is the ``best result'' or ``low probability result''.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect CS or effect DS) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.
Specifically, in the effect CS or effect DS for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the angel existing in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to fly as shown in FIG. 53(D). there is

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game elapses. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the flow when a ball does not enter the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed.
Specifically, FIG. 55A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. 55(B) and (C) are diagrams showing the display screen G when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses. FIG. 55(D) is a view showing the display screen G after a ball has entered the out port 39 or the variable winning through gate 50 after the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 55(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G in a state where the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.
Note that FIG. 55 shows the display screen G when the game result is the "best result", and the same applies when the game result is the "low probability result".

FIG. 56A is a timing chart showing the state of the variable display on the main display section 45 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 56(B) is a timing chart showing the variable display state of the pattern display device 47 (during variable display or stopped). FIG. 56(C) is a timing chart showing the state of the ball entering the variable prize-winning through gate 50 (with or without entering the ball). FIG. 56(D) is a timing chart showing the state of execution of the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813 (opening/closing is in progress or opening/closing is stopped).

When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 55(A), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 56A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. 55(B) and FIG. 56(B), the pattern display device 47 continues to operate until the duration of the effect continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped. The variable display continues (timing T13).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" in step S817D without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, that is, when the waiting time for the round game has passed (timing T3), a gate extension command is set in step S819D. When the MPU 92 determines in step S1316D that the gate addition command has been received, in step S1317D it sets the gate addition notification command. Based on the gate addition notification command transmitted from MPU 92, MPU 102, as shown in FIG. is displayed, the player is notified that the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started with the entry of the ball into the out port 39 as a trigger.

Here, since the out port 39 allows most of the game balls hit into the game area to enter, the player rotates the shooting handle 27 to hit the game ball into the game area, thereby making the game ball out. A game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering the ball into the mouth 39. - 特許庁

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T6). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812D, as shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the MPU 62 sets an out-port entry flag in the RAM 64 in the read processing of step S101D when a ball is entered into the out-port 39 . Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S820D that the out-port ball line flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the big winning hole opening/closing process in step S813.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when executing the big winning opening opening process in step S904 for the first time after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

Here, when the ball enters the variable prize-winning through gate 50 (when the ball enters the out port 39) after the performance duration time has elapsed, the ready-to-win display is not ended (skipped). In this case, since the effect end execution flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared in step S1319D, the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94.
Therefore, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" in step S1312 and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the effect is generated for the open/close execution mode. Select CL or effect DL. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 selects the effect DL as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. .

Then, when the game result is the "best result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and displays the angels as shown in FIG. 55(C). By making the player win, the ready-to-win display is terminated and the player is informed that the game result is the ``best result'' or ``low probability result''.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(D), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect CL or effect DL) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. do.
Specifically, in the effect CL or effect DL for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays a reproduced image of the angel winning the battle between the angel and the devil on the pattern display device 47, as shown in FIG. 55(E). It is enlarged and displayed on the display screen G.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is based on the effect viewing period from when the ready-to-win display is executed on the symbol display device 47 until the ready-to-win display is finished. It functions as an effect change unit that changes the effect for the execution mode.
Specifically, in the effect determination process, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode (effect during a game in a specific control state) directed to the player whose effect viewing period was short is set as the effect CS or effect DS, and the effect viewing period is long. The effect CL or the effect DL for the opening/closing execution mode directed to the player (the effect during the game in the specific control state).

In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has passed, this is regarded as a short effect viewing time (short-term effect viewing time), and the waiting time for the round game is A long performance viewing time (long-term performance viewing time) is defined as a case where a ball does not enter the variable prize-winning through gate 50 before the elapse of, and the performance determination process is based on this performance viewing period, the game state transition processing. The production for the opening and closing execution mode that starts with was changed.
On the other hand, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses, the time until the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 is measured. Based on the effect viewing time, the effect determining process may change the effect for the opening/closing execution mode started in the game state transition process.
In short, the effect change unit changes the effect during the game in the specific control state started by the specific control start unit based on the effect viewing period from when the expected effect is executed by the variable display means until the expected effect is finished. Change it.

FIG. 57 shows the ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game round when a ball enters the variable winning through gate before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed and the game result is a "special loss result". 4 is a diagram showing a display screen G; FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 57A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. FIG. 57(B) is a view showing a display screen G when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses and the game result is "special loss". is. FIG. 57(C) is a view showing the display screen G after a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 57(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game cycle.

The flow of the ready-to-win display occurring in the next round of the game when the game result is the "special loss result" will be described below with reference to FIGS. 54 and 57 described above.
When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 57(A), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed" on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, so that you can hit right-handed. Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 54A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the waiting time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. Since it is set as the performance continuation time, as shown in FIG. 54B, the variable display of the pattern display device 47 continues even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T2). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812D, as shown in FIG.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when executing the big winning opening opening process of step S904 for the first time after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process of step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

If it is determined in step S1309 that the opening command has been received before the effect continuation time elapses after the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 executes effect end processing in step S1311. In this effect ending process, the MPU 92 ends the effect selected in the process of determining the effect pattern in step S1307D. In other words, the MPU 92 ends the ready-to-win display and stops the variable display of the symbol display device 47, as shown in FIG. 54(B).
In this manner, in the effect ending process, the MPU 92 terminates (skips) the ready-to-win display before the effect continuation time elapses when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger.

In this embodiment, as described above, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." It is suggested to the player that the reach display can be skipped by pressing, but it is not necessary to suggest to the player. In this case, the player may determine whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right by confirming whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 is stopped.

Here, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to rows Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize them. Therefore, when the ready-to-win display occurs, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the big win has been won. By daringly confirming the display section 45, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player as to whether or not it is confirmed whether or not the ready-to-win display can be skipped by striking to the right.

Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 102 skips the reach display by hitting right by displaying the devil's line "You can skip by hitting right" present in the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Although it is suggested to the player that it can be done, other methods may be used to suggest to the player that the player can hit right and skip the reach indication. For example, the pachinko machine 10 implements light-emitting means such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) inside the variable winning thru-gate 50, and emits light from the light-emitting means so that the ready-to-win display can be skipped by hitting right. You may suggest to the player.

Here, if a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the effect continuation time elapses, that is, if the ready-to-win display is ended (skipped), the effect end execution flag is stored in the RAM 94 in step S1318D. is set, it means that the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM94.
Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the game result is a "special failure result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and causes the devil to win, as shown in FIG. 57(B). The display is terminated and the player is informed that the game result is a "special loss result".
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect A) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes step S1401 in the next game round when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses and the game result is "special loss". If it is determined that the ready-to-win display is to be generated in step S1405D, it is determined whether or not the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM94.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is set, in step S1406D, the MPU 92 executes normal ready-to-win display setting processing. In this normal reach display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets the normal reach display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1402.

The MPU 102 executes the normal ready-to-win display on the symbol display device 47 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 .
Specifically, when the normal ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , and the angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 is made to compete with a new character different from the devil existing on the left side. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.

FIG. 58 is a display of a ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game round when a ball enters the variable winning through gate after the waiting time for the round game has passed and the game result is a "special loss result". FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a screen G; FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 58A is a diagram showing the display screen G when the ready-to-win display occurs. FIGS. 58B and 58C are diagrams showing the display screen G when the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has elapsed. FIG. 58(D) shows the display screen G when a ball enters the out port 39 or the variable winning through gate 50 after the waiting time for the round game has elapsed, and the game result is a "special loss result". It is a figure which shows. FIG. 58(E) is a view showing the display screen G of the ready-to-win display that occurs in the next game cycle.

The flow of the ready-to-win display that occurs in the next round of the game when the game result is the "special loss result" will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 and 58 described above.
When the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. 58(A), reduces the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and arranges them at the lower left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display the symbols. An angel existing on the right side of the display screen G of the device 47 and a devil existing on the left side are made to fight. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.
In addition, when the ready-to-win display is to be generated, the MPU 102 displays the devil's line "You can skip right-handed." Suggest to the player that the reach display can be skipped.

After that, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 56A, the MPU 62 stops the variable display on the main display section 45 (timing T1).
Here, the MPU 92 sets a slightly shorter time (for example, 90 sec) than the standby time for the round game set in the timer counter WT in the above-described step S810 in the process of setting the effect duration for ready-to-win generation in step S1402. 56(B) and FIG. 58(B), the pattern display device 47 is displayed until the effect duration time elapses even after the variable display of the main display section 45 is stopped. The variable display continues (timing T13).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter WT is equal to or less than "0" in step S817D without the ball entering the variable winning through gate 50. In this case, that is, when the waiting time for the round game has passed (timing T3), a gate extension command is set in step S819D. When the MPU 92 determines in step S1316D that the gate addition command has been received, in step S1317D it sets the gate addition notification command. Based on the gate addition notification command transmitted from MPU 92, MPU 102, as shown in FIG. is displayed, the player is notified that the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started with the entry of the ball into the out port 39 as a trigger.

Here, since the out port 39 allows most of the game balls hit into the game area to enter, the player rotates the shooting handle 27 to hit the game ball into the game area, thereby making the game ball out. A game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering the ball into the mouth 39. - 特許庁

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the MPU 62 sets a round game execution flag in the RAM 64 in the through winning process of step S104 when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50. (timing T6). Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S812D, as shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the MPU 62 sets an out-port entry flag in the RAM 64 in the read processing of step S101D when a ball is entered into the out-port 39 . Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S820D that the out-port ball line flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the big winning hole opening/closing process in step S813.

Further, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1002 when executing the big winning opening opening process in step S904 for the first time after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813. The MPU 62 transmits this opening command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1309 that it has received an opening command, in step S1312 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

Here, when the ball enters the variable winning thru gate 50 after the effect continuation time elapses, that is, when the ready-to-win display is not ended (skipped), it is stored in the RAM 94 in step S1319D. Since the effect end execution flag is cleared, the effect end execution flag is not set in the RAM94.
Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "special loss result" in step S1312, it selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, when the game result is a "special failure result", the MPU 102 stops the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and causes the devil to win, as shown in FIG. 58(C). The display is terminated and the player is informed that the game result is a "special loss result".
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(D), the MPU 102 executes the opening/closing execution mode effect (effect A) on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

In addition, the MPU 92, after the waiting time for the round game has passed, a ball enters the out port 39 or the variable winning through gate 50, and the game result is a "special loss result". If it is determined in step S1401 that the ready-to-win display is to be generated, it is determined in step S1405D whether or not the effect end execution flag is set in the RAM 94 .
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1405D that the effect end execution flag is not set, in step S1407D, the MPU 92 executes special ready-to-win display setting processing. In this special ready-to-win display setting process, the MPU 92 selects and sets a special ready-to-win display corresponding to the effect duration time set in step S1402.

The MPU 102 executes the special ready-to-win display on the symbol display device 47 based on the fluctuation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 .
Specifically, when generating the special ready-to-win display, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. After the angel has lost the previous battle between the angel and the devil, the angel stops the devil who is about to leave, and makes the angel and the devil fight again. Also, the MPU 102 informs the player of the result of the lottery according to whether the angel wins this contest.

Thus, in the present embodiment, after the ready-to-win display is executed by the symbol display device 47, the effect determination process is executed next time by the symbol display device 47 based on the effect viewing period until the ready-to-win display is finished. It functions as a production change unit that changes the reach display of.
Specifically, in the effect determination process, the next ready-to-win display for the player whose viewing period for the effect is short is set to the normal ready-to-win display, and the next ready-to-win display for the player who has been watching the effect for a long time is the special ready-to-win display. and

In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game has passed, this is regarded as a short effect viewing time (short-term effect viewing time), and the waiting time for the round game is A long effect viewing time (long-term effect viewing time) is defined as a case where a ball does not enter the variable prize-winning through gate 50 before the elapse of , and the effect determination process is performed on the basis of the effect viewing period in the pattern display device 47. The next reach display to be executed in was changed.
On the other hand, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 before the waiting time for the round game elapses, the time until the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 is measured. The effect determination process may change the next ready-to-win display to be executed by the pattern display device 47 based on the effect viewing time.
In short, the performance changing part should change the next expected performance to be executed by the variable display means based on the performance viewing period until the expected performance is finished after the expected performance is executed by the variable display means.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is based on the effect viewing period from when the ready-to-win display is executed by the pattern display device 47 until the ready-to-win display is finished, and the content of the effect after the ready-to-win display is finished. It functions as a production change unit that changes the
In the present embodiment, the effect change unit changes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode and the next ready-to-win display to be executed by the pattern display device 47 as the content of the effect. You can change it.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (8) and (10) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained. .
(1) The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute the ready-to-win display on the pattern display device 47, and after the ready-to-win display is finished based on the effect viewing period until the ready-to-win display is finished Since the performance determination processing for changing the contents of the performance is provided, the performance for the player whose performance viewing period is short can be differentiated from the performance for the player whose performance viewing period is long. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

(2) The effect determination process changes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, which is started in the game state transition process, based on the effect viewing period. The performance can be made different from the performance for the opening/closing execution mode directed to the player who has spent a long performance viewing period, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.
(3) The effect determination process changes the next ready-to-win display to be executed by the symbol display device 47 based on the effect viewing period. It is possible to make the next ready-to-win display for the player who has been watching the game for a long time different from the next ready-to-win display, so that the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(4) In the game state transition processing, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 or exits from a different exit from the variable winning through gate 50. Since the game in the opening/closing execution mode is started when the ball enters the outlet 39, opening/closing is executed when the ball enters the out port 39 even if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50.例文帳に追加Mode play can be started.
(5) In the game state transition process, the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60, and after a predetermined time has passed, the game in the opening/closing execution mode is started with the ball entering the out port 39 as a trigger. Therefore, even if the ball does not enter the variable winning through gate 50, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started when the ball enters the out port 39.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect determination process is performed by shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 60, and then using the entry of the ball into the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger for the variable winning. It also functions as an opening/closing times notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening/closing times of the device 38 . Specifically, in the effect determination process, the player is notified of the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 by selecting effects A to D as effects for the opening/closing execution mode.

In view of this point, in this embodiment, the variable winning thru gate 50 allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and when the game ball enters the game, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 It functions as a notification entry means for notifying users of useful information. In the effect determination process, after the main controller 60 shifts the game state to the open/close execution mode, the player is notified of information regarding the payout of the game ball when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger. It functions as a payout information reporting unit.

According to this, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 shift the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main control device 60, and then the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 50 as a trigger. Since the player is provided with an effect determination process for notifying the player of the information on the payout of the game ball, the player can confirm the information on the payout of the game ball by entering the game ball into the variable winning through gate 50. can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game to the big winning opening 38a When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the door 38b is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state when a game ball enters, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger port is provided. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the trigger hole.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. was set to On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 opens the opening/closing door 38b when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 38a occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the game ball launch cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and less than or equal to n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open/close execution modes.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open/close execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and a round game with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode 4, 8, 15, 16 times. It had an opening and closing execution mode. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 differs in the mode of the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b, such as half-opening or full-opening. , a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 92, when the game result is the "few rounds high probability result", the information related to the combination of special symbols as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L had decided. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine information related to the stop result.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result" and the "normal loss result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. A lottery for generating a big hit is executed by comparing the success/failure table and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to during the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the number of random numbers that become the "special loss result" is 28, and the occurrence of the big win. Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery of (1), the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of becoming a "special outlier result" may be set lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of a "special out-of-match result" may be set to 0 in the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, the player may create favorable and unfavorable playing states. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a game state advantageous to the player and a game state disadvantageous depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result display section. By storing in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the upper working port 36 and the reserved information regarding the lower working port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information relating to the upper working opening 36 and the holding information relating to the lower working opening 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 37 for completing the game round regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effects for game rounds are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, and are optional. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game cycle by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 47 to operate.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable.
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for a game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 47 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 47 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A> Characteristic A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed on the basis of starting ball entry means (upper actuation opening 36 and lower actuation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the start ball entry means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47),
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. and,
expected effect executing means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing an expected effect by the variable display means to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state;
A specific ball entry means (variable prize winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a specific control start section (game state transition processing ),
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, an expected performance end section (performance determination processing) is provided for ending the expected performance with the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means as a trigger. A game machine characterized by

According to feature A1 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect execution means causes the game state transition means to shift the game state to the specific control state, and then terminates the expected effect triggered by the ball entering the specific ball entry means. Since the expected performance ending part is provided, the player shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state shifting means until the expected performance is ended by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. The expected performance can be seen even after the completion of the game, and the game can be played while enjoying the game. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start section for starting the game in the specific control state when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transfer means, and the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. Since it is provided, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the expected performance, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A ready-to-win display execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) for executing a ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature A2 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect executing means executes the ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Since the display executing section is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to view the ready-to-win display, allowing the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A first internal lottery result (small win result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state;
a second internal lottery result (jackpot result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result;
The ready-to-reach display execution unit, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery , a gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the ready-to-reach display executing unit determines that the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. When the result is the result, the ready-to-win display is executed by the variable display means, so that the player is made to expect that the result of the internal lottery was the result of the second internal lottery by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in feature A3 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
The second internal lottery that provides the player with a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. and a lottery result.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result can cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be put out than the game balls, a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery can be given to the player. By executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in feature A4 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control initiation unit
After setting the opening and closing ball entry means to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game);
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the result of the first internal lottery shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the opening/closing count of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times. The result of the second internal lottery is a specific control that can put out more game balls than a predetermined number by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. Since the game state can be shifted to the state, the ready-to-win display execution part makes the player further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the result of the first internal lottery for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time;
and the second internal lottery result for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a time longer than the predetermined time.

According to feature A6 of the group of the present invention, the first internal lottery result is obtained by setting the opening/closing time of the open/close ball-entering means once to a predetermined time, and the second internal lottery result is obtained by setting the opening/closing ball-entering means once. is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, the game machine is capable of determining whether the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery. As compared with the case of , the game in the specific control state can be ended immediately, and the next internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 or feature A6 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing means is notified to the player when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means. A game machine characterized by comprising (effect determination processing).

According to feature A7 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then, when a ball is entered into the specific ball entry means, the opening and closing ball entry means is activated. Since an opening/closing frequency reporting unit for informing the player of the opening/closing frequency is provided, the player can confirm the opening/closing frequency of the opening/closing ball entry means by entering a game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of openings and closings of the opening/closing ball-entering means, so that the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7 of the invention group,
A game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and another ball entry means (out port 39) different from the specific ball entry means is provided,
The specific control start unit, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, starts the game in the specific control state triggered by the ball entering the other ball-entering means,
The expected effect ending unit terminates the expected effect when starting the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. machine.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then enters a ball into the specific ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means Since a game in a specific control state is started when a ball enters a different ball-entering means, the ball enters the other ball-entering means even if the ball does not enter the specified ball-entering means. can be used as a trigger to start a game in a specific control state.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in feature A8 of the invention group,
The specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time elapses, the specific control state is changed to the specific control state triggered by the ball entering the other ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by starting a game.

According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time elapses, a ball is entered into another ball entry means. Since the game in the specific control state is started as , even if the ball does not enter the specific ball entering means, the game in the specific control state can be started with the entry of the ball into another ball entering means as a trigger. can be done.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9 of the invention group,
The specific control start unit, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, starts the game in the specific control state when a specific time has elapsed,
The expected effect ending unit terminates the expected effect when starting the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. machine.

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, the specific control starter shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means or the specific time elapses. Since the game in the specific control state is started with this as a trigger, the game in the specific control state can be started even if the ball is not entered into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the game machine can reliably start the game in the specific control state after the game state transfer means shifts the game state to the specific control state, and the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expectation performance ending unit is characterized in that the specific ball entry setting unit effectively sets the specific ball entry means, and terminates the expectation performance in response to the ball entering the specific ball entry means. game machine.

According to feature A11 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect ending unit sets the specific ball entering means to valid in the specific ball entering setting part, and terminates the expected effect triggered by a ball entering the specific ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A12.
In the gaming machine described in feature A11 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting section (waiting time setting processing),
If the result of the internal lottery (jackpot result) is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the invalid period setting unit A game machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (small win result) that is disadvantageous to a player.

According to the feature A12 of the group of the present inventions, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A13.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature A13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path, the player can enter the game ball on the same path as when entering the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A14.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature A14 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path, the player can enter the game ball on a path different from when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, the following problems can be solved because the player can play the game comfortably.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine is equipped with shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and when game balls enter an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, in such a gaming machine, after starting the variable display of patterns, an expectation effect is executed so that the player expects that the game state will shift to a specific control state.

However, regardless of whether or not the player wins the jackpot lottery, the player has to watch the expected performance to the end, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

<Feature B Group> Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising starting ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37),
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. and,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the game in the specific control state is started when a ball is entered into the specific ball entry means or when a specific time elapses. A gaming machine comprising a control start section (game state transition processing).

According to the feature B1 of the group of inventions, the specific control starting section shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means or the specific time elapses. Since the game in the specific control state is started with this as a trigger, the game in the specific control state can be started even if the ball is not entered into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the game machine can reliably start the game in the specific control state after the game state transfer means shifts the game state to the specific control state, and the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
Variable display means (symbol display device 47) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns based on the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
Expected effect execution means (sound light emitting control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing expected effect by the variable display means to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, an expected performance end section (performance determination processing) is provided for ending the expected performance when starting the game in the specific control state. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature B2 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then, when starting the game in the specific control state, i.e., to the specific ball entry means. When a ball is entered or when a specific time elapses, the expected effect ending section is provided, so that the player can use the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started. Even after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by pressing, the expected performance can be seen, and the game can be enjoyed. Further, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the expected performance, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A ready-to-win display execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) is provided for executing a ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player. game machine.

According to feature B3 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect executing means executes the ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Since the display execution part is provided, the player can see the ready-to-win display even after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state shifting means until the game in the specific control state is started, and enjoyment. You can play while playing. Also, the player can end the ready-to-win display and start a game in a specific control state by entering a game ball into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to view the ready-to-win display, allowing the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A first internal lottery result (small win result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state;
a second internal lottery result (jackpot result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result;
The ready-to-reach display executing unit, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery , a gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the ready-to-reach display execution unit determines that the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. When the result is the result, the ready-to-win display is executed by the variable display means, so that the player is made to expect that the result of the internal lottery was the result of the second internal lottery by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B4 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
The second internal lottery providing the player with a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. and a lottery result.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result can cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be put out than the game balls, a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery can be given to the player. By executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in feature B5 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Equipped with means (variable winning device 38),
The specific control initiation unit
After setting the opening and closing ball entry means to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game);
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, the result of the first internal lottery shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the opening/closing count of the open/close ball entry means to a predetermined number of times. The result of the second internal lottery is a specific control that can put out more game balls than a predetermined number by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. Since the game state can be shifted to the state, the ready-to-win display execution part makes the player further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in feature B6 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the result of the first internal lottery for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time;
and the second internal lottery result for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a time longer than the predetermined time.

According to feature B7 of the group of the present invention, the first internal lottery result is set to a predetermined time for one open/close ball entry means, and the second internal lottery result is one opening/closing ball entry means. is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, the game machine is capable of determining whether the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery. As compared with the case where the next internal lottery can be executed immediately, the variable display means can start variable display of a plurality of patterns. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in feature B6 or feature B7 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing means is notified to the player when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means. A game machine characterized by comprising (effect determination processing).

According to feature B8 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then, when a ball enters the specific ball entry means, the opening and closing ball entry means is activated. Since an opening/closing frequency reporting unit for informing the player of the opening/closing frequency is provided, the player can confirm the opening/closing frequency of the opening/closing ball entry means by entering a game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of openings and closings of the opening/closing ball-entering means, so that the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A disadvantageous side internal lottery result that shifts to a game state disadvantageous to the player;
Transitioning to a game state more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state transitioned by the disadvantageous internal lottery result, and disguising the advantageous internal lottery result as if it were the disadvantageous game state;
The expected performance execution means is
As an expectation performance to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, the camouflage is released and the promotion performance to notify the player of the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side is displayed by the variable display. The game machine is characterized by comprising a promotion performance executing part executed by means.

According to feature B9 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect executing means cancels camouflage as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and the result is an advantageous side internal lottery result. Since the promotion effect execution part for notifying the player of the promotion effect is executed by the variable display means, the player is kept in the game state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started. to a specific control state, the promotion performance can be seen, and the game can be enjoyed. Also, the player can end the promotion effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B9 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expected effect ending unit enables the specific ball entering means by the specific ball entering setting unit, and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specified ball entering means. game machine.

According to feature B10 of the group of the present inventions, the expected performance end unit sets the specific ball entry setting unit to enable the specific ball entry means, and terminates the expectation performance triggered by the entry into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine described in feature B10 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting processing),
If the result of the internal lottery (jackpot result) that is advantageous to the player is based on the result of the internal lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the invalid period setting unit A game machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (small win result) that is disadvantageous to a player.

According to feature B11 of the group of the present inventions, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature B12 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entering means is arranged on the first path, the player can enter the game ball on the same path as when entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B13.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature B13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path, the player can enter the game ball on a different path than when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, it finally causes the display device to stop displaying a combination of specific symbols, etc., and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. There is a problem that the flow becomes monotonous when winning the lottery.

<Characteristic group C> Characteristic C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed on the basis of starting ball entry means (upper actuation opening 36 and lower actuation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the start ball entry means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47),
expectation effect executing means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing, by the variable display means, an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state;
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area,
The expected performance execution means is
an expected effect ending section (effect determination processing) for ending the expected effect triggered by the ball entering the specific ball entering means;
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expected effect ending unit enables the specific ball entering means by the specific ball entering setting unit, and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specified ball entering means. game machine.

According to feature C1 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect ending unit sets the specific ball entering means to be effective in the specific ball entering setting part, and terminates the expected effect triggered by a ball entering the specific ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
An invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting process) for setting an invalid period for invalidating the specific ball entry means in the specific ball entry setting unit,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, if the result of the internal lottery is advantageous for the player, the invalid period setting unit The game machine is characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of a disadvantageous internal lottery result.

According to the feature C2 of the group of the present inventions, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A ready-to-win display execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) is provided for executing a ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player. game machine.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means executes the ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Since the display execution part is provided, the player can see the ready-to-win display until finishing the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the specific ball-entering means, and can enjoy playing the game. . Further, when the specific ball entering means is set to be effective in the specific ball entering means, the player can terminate the ready-to-win display by causing the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to view the ready-to-win display, allowing the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the invention group,
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. with
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a specific control start section (game state transition processing ),
The internal lottery is
A first internal lottery result (small win result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state;
a second internal lottery result (jackpot result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result;
The ready-to-reach display execution unit, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery , a gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the ready-to-reach display executing unit determines that the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. When the result is the result, the ready-to-win display is executed by the variable display means, so that the player is made to expect that the result of the internal lottery was the result of the second internal lottery by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start section for starting the game in the specific control state when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transfer means, and the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. Since it is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to end the ready-to-win display and start the game in the specific control state, so that the player can comfortably play the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
The second internal lottery that provides the player with a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. and a lottery result.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result can cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be put out than the game balls, a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery can be given to the player. By executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control initiation unit
After setting the opening and closing ball-entering means to the open state until setting it to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game);
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results.

According to feature C6 of the present invention group, the result of the first internal lottery shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the opening/closing count of the open/close ball entry means to a predetermined number of times. The result of the second internal lottery is a specific control that can put out more game balls than a predetermined number by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. Since the game state can be shifted to the state, the ready-to-win display execution part makes the player further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in feature C6 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the result of the first internal lottery for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time;
and the second internal lottery result for setting one opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball-entering means to a time longer than the predetermined time.

According to feature C7 of the group of the present invention, the first internal lottery result is obtained by setting the opening/closing time of one opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time, and the second internal lottery result is one opening/closing ball entry means. is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, the game machine is capable of determining whether the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery. As compared with the case where the next internal lottery can be executed immediately, the variable display means can start variable display of a plurality of patterns. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in feature C6 or feature C7 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the number of times of opening and closing notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means triggered by the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means. A game machine characterized by comprising (effect determination processing).

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the opening and closing ball entry means is triggered by the entry into the specific ball entry means. Since an opening/closing frequency reporting unit for informing the player of the opening/closing frequency is provided, the player can confirm the opening/closing frequency of the opening/closing ball entry means by entering a game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of openings and closings of the opening/closing ball-entering means, so that the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A disadvantageous side internal lottery result that shifts to a game state disadvantageous to the player;
Transitioning to a game state more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state transitioned by the disadvantageous internal lottery result, and disguising the advantageous internal lottery result as if it were the disadvantageous game state;
The expected performance execution means is
As an expectation performance to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, the camouflage is canceled and the promotion performance to notify the player of the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side is displayed by the variable display. The game machine is characterized by comprising a promotion performance executing part executed by means.

According to feature C9 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect executing means cancels camouflage as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and the advantageous side internal lottery result is obtained. Since the promotion performance executing part is provided for executing the promotion performance for informing the player of the fact by the variable display means, the player ends the promotion performance by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. You can watch the promotion effect until it is activated, and you can play the game while enjoying it. Further, when the specific ball entering means is set to be effective in the specific ball entering means, the player can end the promotion performance by causing the game ball to enter the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, the specific ball entering means is arranged on the first path, so that the player can enter the game ball on the same path as when entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, the specific ball entering means is arranged on the second path, so that the player can enter the game ball on a path different from the case where the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, in such a gaming machine, after starting the variable display of patterns, an expectation effect is executed to make the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player.

However, although the player's sense of expectation fluctuates according to the progress of the expected presentation, the player has to watch the expected presentation to the end, so there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable with this. be.

<Feature D Group> Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed on the basis of starting ball entry means (upper actuation opening 36 and lower actuation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the start ball entry means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47),
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. and,
expectation effect executing means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing, by the variable display means, an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state;
Notification ball entry means (variable winning through gates 50, 50A and round Equipped with a number notification through gate 51),
The internal lottery is
a first internal lottery result (a small win result or a four-round best advantage result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
A second internal lottery that provides a player with a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out. an outcome (jackpot outcome, 8 round best outcome, or 16 round best outcome);
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a payout information notification unit (effect decision processing).

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the expected effect executing means relates to the payout of the game ball triggered by the entry into the notification ball entry means after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. Since a payout information reporting unit for reporting information to the player is provided, the player can confirm the information regarding the payout of the game ball by entering the game ball into the reporting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control state is defined as one game (round game) from setting the opening/closing ball-entering means to the open state to setting it to the closed state again,
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the payout information notification unit changes the number of openings and closings of the opening and closing ball entry means to the player when the ball enters the notification ball entry means. A game machine characterized by notifying a player of information regarding the payout of game balls by notifying the player of the game ball.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the payout information reporting unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state shifting means, and then activates the opening/closing ball-entering means when a ball enters the reporting means. By informing the player of the number of times of opening and closing, the player is notified of the information on the payout of the game ball, so the player can change the number of times of opening and closing the ball entry means by causing the notification ball entry means to enter the game ball. can be confirmed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entering means is arranged on the first path, the player can enter the game ball on the same path as when entering the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature D4 of the present invention group, the specific ball entering means is arranged on the second path, so that the player can enter the game ball on a different path than when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A notification ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the notification ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The payout information notifying unit notifies the player of the information regarding the payout of the game ball triggered by the notification ball entry setting unit setting the notification ball entry means to be effective, and the entry of the ball into the notification ball entry means. A game machine characterized by notifying.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the payout information notification unit sets the notification ball entry means to be effective in the notification ball entry setting unit, and pays out game balls triggered by a ball entering the notification ball entry means. Since it is possible to notify the player of the information regarding the payout of the game balls, it is possible to diversify the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in feature D5 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting section (waiting time setting processing),
The invalid period setting unit provides the player with a value higher than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. In the case of the second internal lottery result to be awarded, the invalid period is longer than in the case of the first internal lottery result of shifting the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. A game machine characterized by setting.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit shifts the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, thereby making the game more than the first internal lottery result. In the case of the second internal lottery result giving a high value to the player, the invalid period is compared with the case of the first internal lottery result shifting the game state to a specific control state capable of putting out a predetermined number of game balls. is set longer, the player's expectation can be heightened as the timing of informing the player of the information regarding the payout of game balls is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of internal lottery results with different numbers of game balls to be put out in a specific control state, and informs the player of information regarding the payout of the game balls when shifting to the specific control state. are doing.

However, the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the payout of the game balls becomes monotonous, so there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature group E> Feature E1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed on the basis of starting ball entry means (upper actuation opening 36 and lower actuation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the start ball entry means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47),
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. and,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state shift means, the variable display means executes an expectation performance that makes the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player. Expected effect execution means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100);
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 50) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a specific control start section (game state transition processing ),
The expected performance execution means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an expected performance end section (performance determination processing) for ending the expected performance with the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means as a trigger.

According to the feature E1 of the group of the present invention, the expected effect executing means expects the player to be in an advantageous state for the player after the game state shifting means shifts the game state to the specific control state. Expected performance is executed by the variable display means. In addition, since the expected performance executing means has an expected performance ending section for ending the expected performance with the entry of a ball into the specific ball entering means as a trigger, the player can enter the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Thus, the expected performance can be seen until the expected performance is finished, and the player can enjoy the game. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start section for starting the game in the specific control state when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transfer means, and the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. Since it is provided, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the expected performance, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A disadvantageous side internal lottery result (low probability result) that shifts to a game state disadvantageous to the player,
The advantageous side internal lottery result (the most advantageous) is disguised as if the player is in the disadvantageous game state while transitioning to a game state more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state shifted by the disadvantageous side internal lottery result. result) and prepare
The expected performance execution means is
As an expectation performance to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, the camouflage is canceled and the promotion performance to notify the player of the result of the internal lottery on the advantageous side is displayed by the variable display. A game machine characterized by comprising a promotion performance execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) executed by means.

According to feature E2 of the group of the present invention, the expected effect executing means cancels disguise as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and the result is an advantageous side internal lottery result. Since the promotion effect execution part for notifying the player of the promotion effect is executed by the variable display means, the player is kept in the game state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started. to a specific control state, the promotion performance can be seen, and the game can be enjoyed. Also, the player can end the promotion effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the promotion effect, and allows the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expected effect ending unit enables the specific ball entering means by the specific ball entering setting unit, and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specified ball entering means. game machine.

According to feature E3 of the group of the present inventions, the expected effect ending section ends the expected effect triggered by the fact that the specific ball entry setting section effectively sets the specific ball entry means and the entry into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in feature E3 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting processing),
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, if the result of the internal lottery is advantageous for the player, the invalid period setting unit The game machine is characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of a disadvantageous internal lottery result.

According to feature E4 of the present invention group, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of an internal lottery result that is advantageous to the player than in the case of the internal lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E4 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to feature E5 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entering means is arranged on the first path, the player can enter the game ball on the same path as when entering the starting ball entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E4 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path, the player can enter the game ball on a different path than when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the game state will be advantageous to the player after shifting the game state to the specific control state.

However, regardless of whether or not the player is in an advantageous state, the player has to watch the expected effect to the end, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

<Feature group F> Feature F1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A plurality of patterns are variably displayed on the basis of starting ball entry means (upper actuation opening 36 and lower actuation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the start ball entry means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising variable display means (symbol display device 47),
Game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. and,
expected effect executing means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing an expected effect by the variable display means to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state;
A specific ball entry means (variable prize winning through gates 50, 50A) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a specific control start section (game state transition processing ),
The expected performance execution means is
After the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means, an expected effect ending section (effect determination processing) for ending the expected effect triggered by the ball entering the specific ball entering means;
After the expected performance is executed by the variable display means, the content of the performance after the expected performance is terminated is changed based on the performance viewing period until the expected performance is terminated by the expected performance end section. A game machine characterized by comprising a production change unit (production determination processing) for performing.

According to the characteristic feature F1 of the group of the present invention, the expected effect executing means terminates the expected effect triggered by the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. Since the expected performance ending part is provided, the player shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state shifting means until the expected performance is ended by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. The expected performance can be seen even after the game is finished, and the game can be enjoyed while enjoying the game. Further, the game state transition means has a specific control start section for starting the game in the specific control state when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transfer means, and the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. Since it is provided, the player can end the expected effect and start the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to watch the expected performance, and allows the player to play the game comfortably. Then, the expected effect execution means executes the expected effect by the variable display means, and then determines the effect after the expected effect is finished based on the effect viewing period until the expected effect is finished in the expected effect end part. Since the performance changing part for changing the contents is provided, the performance for the player whose performance viewing period is short can be differentiated from the performance for the player whose performance viewing period is long. Attention to the game can be improved.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the effect changing unit changes the effect during the game in the specific control state started by the specific control start unit (effect for opening/closing execution mode) based on the effect viewing period. .

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the effect change unit changes the effect during the game in the specific control state started by the specific control start unit based on the effect viewing period, so that the game with the short effect viewing period The effect during the game in the specific control state directed to the player can be made different from the effect during the game in the specific control state directed to the player having a long performance viewing period, thereby increasing the attention of the player to the game. can be improved.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2 of the present invention group,
The game machine, wherein the effect change unit changes the next expected effect to be executed by the variable display means based on the effect viewing period.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the effect changing unit changes the next expected effect to be executed by the variable display means based on the effect viewing period. can be made different from the next expected performance directed to the player who has spent a long time viewing the performance, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A ready-to-win display execution unit (determination pattern determination processing) for executing a ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Characteristic game machine.

According to the characteristic feature F4 of the group of the present invention, the expected effect executing means executes the ready-to-win display by the variable display means as an expected effect to make the player expect that the game state will shift to the specific control state. Since the display executing section is provided, the player can end the ready-to-win display by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to view the ready-to-win display, allowing the player to comfortably play the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
A first internal lottery result (small win result) for shifting the game state to the specific control state;
a second internal lottery result (jackpot result) that shifts the game state to the specific control state and gives the player a higher value than the first internal lottery result;
The ready-to-reach display execution unit, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger is the result of the first internal lottery or the result of the second internal lottery , a gaming machine characterized in that the reach display is executed by the variable display means.

According to feature F5 of the present invention group, the ready-to-reach display executing unit determines that the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. When the result is the result, the ready-to-win display is executed by the variable display means, so that the player is made to expect that the result of the internal lottery was the result of the second internal lottery by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature F6.
In the game machine described in feature F5 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out;
The second internal lottery that provides the player with a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery by shifting the game state to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. and a lottery result.

According to feature F6 of the present invention group, the first internal lottery result can shift the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the second internal lottery result can cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out. By shifting the game state to a specific control state in which more game balls can be put out than the game balls, a higher value than the result of the first internal lottery can be given to the player. By executing the ready-to-win display, the player can further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result.

Feature F7.
In the game machine described in feature F6 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control initiation unit
After setting the opening and closing ball-entering means to the open state until setting it to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game);
The internal lottery is
the first internal lottery result that shifts the game state to the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a predetermined number;
By setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the game state is shifted to the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. 2 internal lottery results.

According to feature F7 of the present invention group, the result of the first internal lottery shifts the game state to a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the opening/closing count of the open/close ball entry means to a predetermined number of times. The result of the second internal lottery is a specific control that can put out more game balls than a predetermined number by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. Since the game state can be shifted to the state, the ready-to-win display execution part makes the player further expect that the result of the internal lottery was the second internal lottery result by executing the ready-to-win display. be able to.

Feature F8.
In the game machine described in feature F7 of the invention group,
The internal lottery is
the result of the first internal lottery for setting the opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined time;
and the second internal lottery result for setting one opening/closing time of the opening/closing ball-entering means to a time longer than the predetermined time.

According to feature F8 of the group of the present invention, the first internal lottery result is set to a predetermined time for opening and closing the opening and closing ball entry means once, and the second internal lottery result is one opening and closing ball entry means. is set to a time longer than the predetermined time, the game machine is capable of determining whether the result of the internal lottery is the result of the second internal lottery when the result of the internal lottery is the result of the first internal lottery. As compared with the case of , the game in the specific control state can be ended immediately, and the next internal lottery can be executed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine described in feature F7 or feature F8 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the number of times of opening and closing notification section for notifying the player of the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means triggered by the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry means. A game machine characterized by comprising (effect determination processing).

According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, the expected effect execution means shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the opening and closing ball entry means is triggered by the entry into the specific ball entry means. Since an opening/closing frequency reporting unit for informing the player of the opening/closing frequency is provided, the player can confirm the opening/closing frequency of the opening/closing ball entry means by entering a game ball into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to select whether or not to confirm the number of openings and closings of the opening/closing ball-entering means, so that the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature F10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9 of the present invention group,
A game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and another ball entry means (out port 39) different from the specific ball entry means is provided,
The specific control start unit, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, starts the game in the specific control state triggered by the ball entering the other ball-entering means,
The expected effect ending unit terminates the expected effect when starting the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. machine.

According to the feature F10 of the present invention group, the specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then enters a ball into the specific ball entry means, or the specific ball entry means Since a game in a specific control state is started when a ball enters a different ball-entering means, the ball enters the other ball-entering means even if the ball does not enter the specified ball-entering means. can be used as a trigger to start a game in a specific control state.

Feature F11.
In the gaming machine described in feature F10 of the invention group,
The specific control start unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time elapses, the specific control state is changed to the specific control state triggered by the ball entering the other ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by starting a game.

According to the characteristic feature F11 of the present invention group, the specific control starting unit shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and after a predetermined time elapses, a ball is entered into another ball entry means. Since the game in the specific control state is started as , even if the ball does not enter the specific ball entering means, the game in the specific control state can be started with the entry of the ball into another ball entering means as a trigger. can be done.

Feature F12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11 of the present invention group,
The specific control start unit, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, starts the game in the specific control state when a specific time has elapsed,
The expected effect ending unit terminates the expected effect when starting the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state. machine.

According to the feature F12 of the present invention group, the specific control starting section shifts the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, and then the ball is entered into the specific ball entry means or the specific time has elapsed. Since the game in the specific control state is started with this as a trigger, the game in the specific control state can be started even if the ball is not entered into the specific ball-entering means. Therefore, the game machine can reliably start the game in the specific control state after the game state transfer means shifts the game state to the specific control state, and the player can play the game comfortably.

Feature F13.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F12 of the present invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
A specific ball entry setting unit (game state transition processing and big winning opening opening/closing processing) for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid,
The expected effect ending unit enables the specific ball entering means by the specific ball entering setting unit, and terminates the expected effect when the ball enters the specified ball entering means. game machine.

According to feature F13 of the group of the present invention, the expected performance end unit sets the specific ball entry setting unit to enable the specific ball entry means, and terminates the expectation performance triggered by the entry into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing of ending the expected presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F14.
In the gaming machine described in feature F13 of the invention group,
The expected performance execution means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the invalid period setting unit (waiting time setting processing),
If the result of the internal lottery (jackpot result) that is advantageous to the player is based on the result of the internal lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the invalid period setting unit A game machine characterized in that the invalid period is set longer than in the case of an internal lottery result (small win result) that is disadvantageous to a player.

According to the feature F14 of the group of the present inventions, the invalid period setting unit sets the invalid period longer in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is advantageous for the player than in the case of the result of the internal lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened as the timing of ending the expectation performance is delayed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F15.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the first path.

According to the feature F15 of the present invention group, the specific ball-entering means is arranged on the first path, so that the player can enter the game ball on the same path as when entering the game ball into the starting ball-entering means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F16.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that tends to cause the game ball to enter the starting ball entry means;
a second route (right-handed route) that is less likely to cause a game ball to enter the starting ball entry means than the first route,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path.

According to the feature F16 of the present invention group, the specific ball entry means is arranged on the second path, so that the player can enter the game ball on a different path than when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means. A game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means by firing the . Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns. This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, in such a gaming machine, after starting the variable display of patterns, an expectation effect is executed so that the player expects that the game state will shift to a specific control state.

However, regardless of whether or not the player wins the jackpot lottery, the player has to watch the expected performance to the end, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2005-074175). This gaming machine has a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), a jackpot lottery or the like is performed. An internal lottery is executed, and the variable display of patterns is started. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific patterns on the display device, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, in such a gaming machine, after starting the variable display of patterns, an expectation effect is executed to make the player expect that the game will be in an advantageous state for the player.
However, although the player's sense of expectation fluctuates according to the progress of the expected presentation, the player has to watch the expected presentation to the end, so there is a problem that the player may feel uncomfortable with this. be.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of the player to the game.
<Means>
The gaming machine of this technical concept comprises a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball. starting ball entry means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the starting ball entry means; and variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns based on the result of the predetermined lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the start ball entry means as a trigger. Expected performance executing means for executing expected performance by means of variable display means to make the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state, and a game that flows down the game area. A specific ball entering means for allowing a ball to enter is provided, and the expected performance execution means includes expected performance ending means for ending the expected performance when the ball enters the specific ball entering means, and enables or disables the specific ball entering means. and invalid period setting means for setting the length of the invalid period during which the specific ball entry setting means disables the specific ball entry means, and the expected effect ending means includes the specific ball entry means It is characterized by setting the specified ball entering means to effective by the setting means, and ending the expected performance with the entering of the specified ball into the specified ball entering means as a trigger.
<effect>
According to this technical idea, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

10... Pachinko machine 35... General winning opening 36... Upper operating opening 37... Lower operating opening 38... Variable winning device 38a... Large winning opening 38b... Open/close door 38c... Variable winning driving section 39... Out Mouth, 51... Symbol display device, 60... Main control device, 62... MPU, 90... Sound emission control device,
92...MPU, 100...Display control device, 102...MPU.

Claims (1)

A shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and a predetermined lottery is executed based on the entry of the game ball. A gaming machine comprising starting ball entry means and variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns based on the result of a predetermined lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means. hand,
expectation performance executing means for executing, by the variable display means, an expectation performance that makes the player expect that the player will be in an advantageous state;
A specific ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
The expected performance execution means is
Expectation effect ending means for ending the expected effect triggered by the ball entering the specific ball entering means;
specific ball entry setting means for setting the specific ball entry means to be valid or invalid;
an invalid period setting means for setting a length of an invalid period during which the specific ball entry setting means invalidates the specific ball entry means;
The expected effect ending means is characterized in that the specified ball entering means is set to valid by the specified ball entering means, and the expected effect is terminated when the ball enters the specified ball entering means. game machine.

Images